Mercedes-Benz SLK 2016 Operator's Manual PDF

1 of 358
1 of 358

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz SLK 2016 Operator's Manual PDF

SLK Operator's Manual

Order no. 65153349 13 Part no. 172 584 92 00 Edition A 2016

1725849200C 1725849200

SL KO

pe rat

or' sM

an ua l

Publication details Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG Mercedesstrae 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany

Symbols Registered trademarks: RBluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart, ESP and PRE-SAFE are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. RiPod and iTunes are registered trade- marks of Apple Inc. RLogic7 is a registered trademark of Har- man International Industries. RMicrosoft and Windows media are reg- istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- tion. RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq- uity Digital Corporation. RGracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGATSurvey and related brands are reg- istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- lowing symbols:

G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with infor- mation on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.

i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes- sion indicate an instruction with sev- eral steps.

(Y page)

This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page.

Dis play

This text indicates a message in the multifunction/COMAND/Audio dis- play.

As at 02.10.2014

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc- tions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- Benz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry specification Ravailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROperator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides App:

Apple iOS

Android

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

1725849200 1725849200C

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 21

At a glance ........................................... 29

Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 71

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 107

Climate control ................................. 121

Driving and parking .......................... 137

On-board computer and displays .... 193

Stowage and features ...................... 253

Maintenance and care ...................... 275

Breakdown assistance ..................... 289

Wheels and tires ............................... 307

Technical data ................................... 343

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket

see Sockets

A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 212 Function/notes ................................ 61 Important safety notes .................... 61 Warning lamp ................................. 243

Accident Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 57

Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 127 Active light function ......................... 111 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 69 Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 64 Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 227 Function/notes ............................. 112 Switching on/off ........................... 112

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 349 Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 54 Display message ............................ 223 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 47 Head bag ......................................... 48 Important safety notes .................... 46 Introduction ..................................... 46 Knee bag .......................................... 47 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 49 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- tor lamp ........................................... 41 Side impact air bag .......................... 47

Air vents Important safety notes .................. 134 Setting ........................................... 134 Setting the blower output of the AIRSCARF vents ............................. 135 Setting the center air vents ........... 134 Setting the side air vents ............... 135 Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 100

Air-conditioning system see Climate control

AIRGUIDE ............................................. 90 AIRSCARF

Problem (malfunction) ................... 100 Switching on/off ........................... 100

AIRSCARF vents Setting the blower output .............. 135

Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 69 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 69 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 69

Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lighting Setting the brightness (on-board computer) ...................................... 205

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 208 Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ashtray ............................................... 258 Assistance display (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 203 Assistance menu (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 202 ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 281 Hiding a service message .............. 280 Resetting the service interval dis- play ................................................ 281 Service message ............................ 280 Special service requirements ......... 281

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 69 Function ........................................... 69 Switching off the alarm .................... 69

ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 203 Display message ............................ 230 Function/notes ............................. 187

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 200 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshop

4 Index

Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lights Display message ............................ 227 see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 282 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 145 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 144 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 108 Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 151 Automatic drive program ............... 153 Changing gear ............................... 151 Display message ............................ 236 Driving tips .................................... 151 Emergency running mode .............. 157 Engaging the park position ............ 149 Kickdown ....................................... 152 Manual drive program .................... 153 Manual drive program (vehicles with Sports package AMG) ............ 155 Oil temperature (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 208 Overview ........................................ 148 Problem (malfunction) ................... 157 Program selector button ................ 152 Pulling away ................................... 142 Releasing the parking lock man- ually ............................................... 157 Selector lever ................................ 148 Starting the engine ........................ 142 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 152 Transmission position display ........ 149 Transmission positions .................. 151

Automatic transmission emer- gency mode ....................................... 157

B Backup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 117 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 62 Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 75 Important safety notes .................... 75 Replacing ......................................... 75

Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 298 Display message ............................ 228 Important safety notes .................. 296 Jump starting ................................. 299 Overview ........................................ 296

Belt see Seat belts

Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 203 Display message ............................ 231 Notes/function .............................. 188

Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid Display message ............................ 218 Notes ............................................. 350

Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

Brake lamps Display message ............................ 225

Brakes ABS .................................................. 61 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 64 BAS .................................................. 62 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 350 Display message ............................ 212 EBD .................................................. 69 High-performance brake system .... 167 Important safety notes .................. 165 Maintenance .................................. 166 Parking brake ................................ 161 Riding tips ...................................... 165 Warning lamp ................................. 243

Breakdown Where will I find...? ........................ 290 see Flat tire see Towing away

Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 31 Bulbs

see Replacing bulbs

Index 5

C California

Important notice for retail cus- tomers and lessees .......................... 23

Calling up a malfunction see Display messages

Car see Vehicle

Car key see SmartKey

Care Car wash ........................................ 282 Carpets .......................................... 288 Display ........................................... 286 Exhaust pipe .................................. 285 Exterior lights ................................ 285 Gear or selector lever .................... 286 Interior ........................................... 286 Matte finish ................................... 284 Notes ............................................. 281 Paint .............................................. 283 Plastic trim .................................... 286 Power washer ................................ 283 Roof lining ...................................... 288 Seat belt ........................................ 287 Seat cover ..................................... 287 Sensors ......................................... 285 Steering wheel ............................... 286 Trim pieces .................................... 286 Washing by hand ........................... 282 Wheels ........................................... 284 Windows ........................................ 284 Wiper blades .................................. 285 Wooden trim .................................. 286

CD player/CD changer (on-board computer) .......................................... 201 Center console

Lower section .................................. 35 Upper section .................................. 34

Central locking Automatic locking (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 206 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 72

Changing bulbs High-beam headlamps ................... 116 Low-beam headlamps .................... 116 Reversing lamps ............................ 117

Side marker lamps (rear) ............... 116 Turn signals (front) ......................... 116

Child Restraint system .............................. 59

Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 60 On the front-passenger seat ............ 60 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 60

Children Special seat belt retractor ............... 58

Cigarette lighter ................................ 258 Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 285 Climate control

Air-conditioning system ................. 123 Automatic climate control (dual- zone) .............................................. 125 Controlling automatically ............... 129 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 127 Defrosting the windows ................. 131 Defrosting the windshield .............. 131 General notes ................................ 122 Indicator lamp ................................ 129 Information about using auto- matic climate control ..................... 126 Maximum cooling .......................... 131 Notes on using the air-condition- ing system ..................................... 124 Overview of systems ...................... 122 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 133 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 129 Refrigerant ..................................... 352 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 352 Setting the air distribution ............. 130 Setting the air vents ...................... 134 Setting the airflow ......................... 130 Setting the temperature ................ 129 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 133 Switching on/off ........................... 127 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 133 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 132 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 130

6 Index

Cockpit Overview .......................................... 30 see Instrument cluster

Collapsible spare wheel Inflating ......................................... 340 see Emergency spare wheel

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 203 Display message ............................ 219 Operation/notes .............................. 62

COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 286

Combination switch .......................... 110 Compass

Calibrating ..................................... 273 Calling up ....................................... 272 Setting ........................................... 272

Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 197 Convenience closing feature .............. 85 Convenience opening feature

see Side windows Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 279 Display message ............................ 227 Filling capacity ............................... 351 Important safety notes .................. 350 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 208 Temperature gauge ........................ 195 Warning lamp ................................. 249

Cooling see Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 28 Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 224 Function/notes ............................. 111

Crash-responsive emergency light- ing ....................................................... 114 Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 169 Deactivating ................................... 170 Display message ............................ 233 Driving system ............................... 168 Function/notes ............................. 168 Important safety notes .................. 168

Setting a speed .............................. 169 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 169

Cup holder Center console .............................. 257 Important safety notes .................. 256

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 26 Customer Relations Department ....... 26

D Dashboard

see Instrument cluster Data

see Technical data Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 226 Function/notes ............................. 108 Switching on/off (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 205

Declarations of conformity ................. 25 Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 205 Interior lighting .............................. 206

Diagnostics connection ...................... 25 Digital speedometer ......................... 198 Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 280 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 211 Driving systems ............................. 230 Engine ............................................ 227 General notes ................................ 211 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 211 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 240 Lights ............................................. 224 Safety systems .............................. 212 SmartKey ....................................... 240 Tires ............................................... 234 Vehicle ........................................... 236

Distance recorder ............................. 197 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 251 Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 63 DISTRONIC PLUS

Cruise control lever ....................... 172 Deactivating ................................... 176

Index 7

Display message ............................ 232 Displays in the multifunction dis- play ................................................ 176 Driving tips .................................... 177 Function/notes ............................. 170 Important safety notes .................. 171 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 175 Stopping ........................................ 173 Warning lamp ................................. 251

Doors Automatic locking (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 206 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 79 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 72 Control panel ................................... 37 Display message ............................ 238 Emergency locking ........................... 80 Emergency unlocking ....................... 80 Important safety notes .................... 78 Opening (from inside) ...................... 78 Overview .......................................... 78

Drinking and driving ......................... 164 Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 153 Display ........................................... 149 Manual ........................................... 153 Manual (vehicles with Sports package AMG) ............................... 155 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 208

Driver's door see Doors

Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 281

Driving on flooded roads .................. 167 Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 61 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 69 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 64 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 62 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 62 Distance warning function ............... 63 EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution) ............................................. 69 ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ............................................... 65

Important safety information ........... 61 Overview .......................................... 61

Driving systems ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 187 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 188 Cruise control ................................ 168 Display message ............................ 230 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 170 Driving Assistance package ........... 188 Dynamic handling package ............ 178 HOLD function ............................... 179 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 189 Parking Guidance ........................... 184 PARKTRONIC ................................. 181

Driving tips Automatic transmission ................. 151 Brakes ........................................... 165 Break-in period .............................. 138 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 177 Downhill gradient ........................... 165 Drinking and driving ....................... 164 Driving in winter ............................. 167 Driving on flooded roads ................ 167 Driving on wet roads ...................... 167 Exhaust check ............................... 164 Fuel ................................................ 164 General .......................................... 163 Hydroplaning ................................. 167 Icy road surfaces ........................... 167 Limited braking efficiency on sal- ted roads ....................................... 166 Snow chains .................................. 311 Wet road surface ........................... 166

DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... 201

Dynamic handling package Function/notes ............................. 178

E EASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 206 Function/notes ............................. 101

EASY-EXIT feature Crash-responsive ........................... 102 Function/notes ............................. 101 Switching on/off ........................... 206

8 Index

EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution)

Display message ............................ 214 Function/notes ................................ 69

ECO display Function/notes ............................. 164 On-board computer ....................... 198

ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 145 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 144 Deactivating/activating ................. 145 General information ....................... 143 Important safety notes .................. 143 Introduction ................................... 143

Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 57

Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 80 Trunk ............................................... 82 Vehicle ............................................. 80

Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 339 Important safety notes .................. 339 Removing ....................................... 340 Stowing .......................................... 340 Technical data ............................... 342

Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 54

Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 22

Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 249 Display message ............................ 227 ECO start/stop function ................ 143 Engine number ............................... 346 Irregular running ............................ 147 Jump-starting ................................. 299 Starting problems .......................... 147 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 142 Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 142 Switching off .................................. 161 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 303

Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 344

Problem (malfunction) ................... 147 Engine oil

Adding ........................................... 278 Additives ........................................ 349 Checking the oil level ..................... 277 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 277 Display message ............................ 229 Filling capacity ............................... 349 Notes about oil grades ................... 349 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 277 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 208 Viscosity ........................................ 349

ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 208 Characteristics ................................. 66 Deactivating/activating (except MercedesAMG vehicles) ................. 66 Deactivating/activating (MercedesAMG vehicles) ................ 67 Display message ............................ 212 Function/notes ................................ 65 General notes .................................. 65 Important safety information ........... 66 Warning lamp ................................. 245

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- tem) ...................................................... 66 Exhaust check ................................... 164 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 285 Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 108 see Lights

Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 103 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 207 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 104 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 106 Storing the parking position .......... 105

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 255

Index 9

F Filler cap

see Refueling Filling capacities (Technical data) ... 347 Flat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 291 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 291 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 292 see Emergency spare wheel

Floormats ........................................... 273 Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 344 Two-way radio ................................ 344

Fuel Additives ........................................ 348 Consumption statistics .................. 197 Displaying the current consump- tion ................................................ 198 Displaying the range ...................... 198 Driving tips .................................... 164 Fuel gauge ....................................... 31 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 348 Important safety notes .................. 347 Problem (malfunction) ................... 160 Refueling ........................................ 158 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 347

Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... 159

Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 198

Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 347 Problem (malfunction) ................... 160

Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... 290 Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 304 Before changing ............................. 304 Fuse box in the engine compart- ment .............................................. 304 Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 305 Important safety notes .................. 304

G Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 271 General notes ................................ 268 Important safety notes .................. 268 Opening/closing the garage door .. 271 Programming (button in the rear- view mirror) ................................... 268 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 269

Gear indicator (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 208 Genuine parts ...................................... 21 Glove box ........................................... 254

H Handbrake

see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... 111

Display message ............................ 240 Head bags

Display message ............................ 221 Operation ......................................... 48

Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ........ 100 Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 98 see NECK-PRO head restraints

Headlamps Cleaning system (notes) ................ 351 Fogging up ..................................... 113 see Automatic headlamp mode

Heating see Climate control

High-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. 116 Display message ............................ 225 Switching on/off ........................... 110

Hill start assist .................................. 142 HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 179 Deactivating ................................... 180 Display message ............................ 230 Function/notes ............................. 179

Hood Closing ........................................... 277 Display message ............................ 238 Important safety notes .................. 276

10 Index

Opening ......................................... 276 Horn ...................................................... 30 Hydroplaning ..................................... 167

I Ignition lock

see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 69 Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .............................................. 251

Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps

Indicators see Turn signals

Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 31 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 194 Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 113 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 206 Emergency lighting ........................ 114 Manual control ............................... 114 Overview ........................................ 113 Reading lamp ................................. 113 Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 205

J Jack

Storage location ............................ 290 Using ............................................. 332

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 299

K Key positions

KEYLESS-GO .................................. 140 SmartKey ....................................... 139

KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing feature ............ 85 Deactivation ..................................... 73 Display message ............................ 240 Locking ............................................ 73

Removing the Start/Stop button ... 141 Start/Stop button .......................... 140 Starting the engine ........................ 142 Unlocking ......................................... 73

Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 152 Manual drive program .................... 156

Knee bag .............................................. 47

L Lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 204 Display message ............................ 231 Function/information .................... 189

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 208 License plate lamp (display mes- sage) ................................................... 225 Light function, active

Display message ............................ 226 Light sensor (display message) ....... 227 Lights

Activating/deactivating the inte- rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 206 Active light function ....................... 111 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 108 Cornering light function ................. 111 Fogged up headlamps .................... 113 Hazard warning lamps ................... 111 High beam flasher .......................... 110 High-beam headlamps ................... 110 Light switch ................................... 108 Low-beam headlamps .................... 109 Parking lamps ................................ 110 Rear fog lamp ................................ 109 Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 205 Standing lamps .............................. 110 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 205 Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (on- board computer) ............................ 205

Index 11

Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) .......... 205 Turn signals ................................... 110 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs

Locking see Central locking

Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 79 Emergency locking ........................... 80 From inside (central locking but- ton) .................................................. 79

Locking centrally see Central locking

Locking verification signal (on- board computer) ............................... 206 Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 116 Display message ............................ 224 Switching on/off ........................... 109

Luggage cover see Trunk partition

Lumbar support ................................... 99

M M+S tires ............................................ 310 MAGIC SKY CONTROL ......................... 91 Malfunction message

see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 284 mbrace

Call priority .................................... 263 Display message ............................ 218 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 264 Downloading routes ....................... 267 Emergency call .............................. 261 General notes ................................ 259 Geo fencing ................................... 267 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 266 MB info call button ........................ 263 Remote fault diagnosis .................. 266 Remote vehicle locking .................. 265 Roadside Assistance button .......... 262 Search & Send ............................... 264 Self-test ......................................... 260

Speed alert .................................... 267 System .......................................... 260 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 268 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 265

Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 74 Inserting .......................................... 75 Locking vehicle ................................ 80 Removing ......................................... 74 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 80

Media Interface see Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) ......................... 201 Memory function ............................... 106 Message memory (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 211 Messages

see Display messages Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phone Frequencies ................................... 344 Installation ..................................... 344 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 201 Transmission output (maximum) .... 344

Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 74 MOExtended tires .............................. 291 Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 334 Mounting a new wheel ................... 334 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 331 Raising the vehicle ......................... 332 Removing a wheel .......................... 333 Securing the vehicle against roll- ing away ........................................ 331

MP3 see separate operating instructions

Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 196 Permanent display ......................... 205

Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 195 Overview .......................................... 33

12 Index

N Navigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 199 NECK-PRO head restraints

Important safety notes .................... 56 Operation ......................................... 56 Resetting triggered .......................... 56

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- cle ....................................................... 138

O Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 49 Faults ............................................... 53 Operation ......................................... 49 System self-test ............................... 51

Occupant safety Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 57 Children in the vehicle ..................... 57 Important safety notes .................... 41 Introduction to the restraint sys- tem .................................................. 40 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 49 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 41 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 60 PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) ............................... 56 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 41

OCS Conditions ....................................... 49 Faults ............................................... 53 Operation ......................................... 49 System self-test ............................... 51

Odometer ........................................... 197 Oil

see Engine oil On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 208 Assistance menu ........................... 202 Audio menu ................................... 200 Convenience submenu .................. 206 Display messages .......................... 211

Displaying a service message ........ 281 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 176 Factory settings submenu ............. 207 Important safety notes .................. 194 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 204 Lighting submenu .......................... 205 Menu overview .............................. 197 Message memory .......................... 211 Navigation menu ............................ 199 Operation ....................................... 195 RACETIMER ................................... 208 Service menu ................................. 204 Settings menu ............................... 204 Standard display ............................ 197 Telephone menu ............................ 201 Trip menu ...................................... 197 Vehicle submenu ........................... 206 Video DVD operation ..................... 201

Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 25 Important safety notes .................... 24

Operating system see On-board computer

Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment ........................... 22

Outside temperature display ........... 195 Overhead control panel ...................... 36

P Paint code number ............................ 345 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 283 Panic alarm .......................................... 40 Parking

Engaging park position .................. 149 Important safety notes .................. 160 Parking brake ................................ 161 Position of exterior mirror, front- passenger side ............................... 105 see PARKTRONIC

Parking aid Parking Guidance ........................... 184 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC

Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC

Parking brake Display message ............................ 215

Index 13

Electric parking brake .................... 161 Warning lamp ................................. 248

Parking Guidance Display message ............................ 232 Important safety notes .................. 184

Parking lamps Switching on/off ........................... 110

PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 183 Driving system ............................... 181 Function/notes ............................. 181 Important safety notes .................. 181 Problem (malfunction) ................... 184 Range of the sensors ..................... 181 Warning display ............................. 182

PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 223 Problems (malfunction) .................. 223

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Indicator lamp .................................. 41

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 60 Pivoting draft stop

see AIRGUIDE Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 286 Power washers .................................. 283 Power windows

see Side windows PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection)

Display message ............................ 218 Operation ......................................... 56

Program selector button .................. 152 Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 69 Immobilizer ...................................... 69

Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 21

Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 142 General notes ................................ 142

Q QR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 27

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 25

R RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 208 Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 200 Radio-wave reception/transmis- sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 25 Reading lamp ..................................... 113 Rear fog lamp

Display message ............................ 226 Switching on/off ........................... 109

Rear lamps see Lights

Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 133 Switching on/off ........................... 132

Rear-view mirror Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 103 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- tem)

Important safety notes .................. 352 Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 31 Important safety notes .................. 158 Refueling process .......................... 158 see Fuel

Releasing the parking lock man- ually (automatic transmission) ........ 157 Remote control

Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 268

Replacing bulbs Important safety notes .................. 114 Overview of bulb types .................. 115 Removing/replacing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 115

Reporting safety defects .................... 26 Rescue card ......................................... 27 Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 230 Warning lamp ................................. 249 see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 133

14 Index

Restraint system Display message ............................ 220 Introduction ..................................... 40 Warning lamp ................................. 248 Warning lamp (function) ................... 41

Reverse gear Engaging (automatic transmis- sion) ............................................... 148

Reversible floor panel (trunk) .......... 256 Reversing feature

Side windows ................................... 83 Reversing lamps (display mes- sage) ................................................... 226 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23 Roof

Display message ............................ 239 Important safety notes .................... 86 Opening/closing (with roof switch) ............................................. 87 Opening/closing (with Smart- Key) ................................................. 88 Overview .......................................... 86 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 93 Relocking ......................................... 88

Roof carrier ........................................ 256 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 288 Roof switch .......................................... 87

S Safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 57 Safety system

see Driving safety systems Seat belts

Adjusting the driver's and front- passenger seat belt ......................... 45 Cleaning ......................................... 287 Correct usage .................................. 43 Fastening ......................................... 44 Important safety guidelines ............. 42 Introduction ..................................... 42 Releasing ......................................... 45 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 207 Warning lamp ................................. 242 Warning lamp (function) ................... 45

Seats Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 98 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- port .................................................. 99 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 98 Cleaning the cover ......................... 287 Correct driver's seat position ........... 96 Important safety notes .................... 97 Overview .......................................... 97 Seat heating problem .................... 100 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 106 Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 100 Switching seat heating on/off ......... 99

Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... 286

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 285 Service menu (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 204 Service message

see ASSYST PLUS Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 350 Coolant (engine) ............................ 350 Engine oil ....................................... 349 Fuel ................................................ 347 Important safety notes .................. 347 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- tem) ............................................... 352 Washer fluid ................................... 351

Setting the air distribution ............... 130 Setting the airflow ............................ 130 Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 207 On-board computer ....................... 204

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 208 Side impact air bag ............................. 47 Side marker lamp

Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 116 Side marker lamp (display mes- sage) ................................................... 226 Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 284 Convenience closing feature ............ 85 Important safety information ........... 83 Opening/closing (all) ....................... 84

Index 15

Opening/closing (front) ................... 83 Overview .......................................... 83 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 86 Resetting ......................................... 85 Reversing feature ............................. 83

SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 75 Changing the programming ............. 74 Checking the battery ....................... 75 Convenience opening feature .......... 84 Display message ............................ 240 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 72 Important safety notes .................... 72 Loss ................................................. 77 Mechanical key ................................ 74 Opening/closing the roof ................ 88 Overview .......................................... 72 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 139 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 77 Starting the engine ........................ 142

Snow chains ...................................... 311 Sockets

Center console .............................. 259 General notes ................................ 259 Under the armrest ......................... 259

Spare wheel Stowing .......................................... 340

Special seat belt retractor .................. 58 Specialist workshop ............................ 25 Speed, controlling

see Cruise control Speedometer

Digital ............................................ 198 In the Instrument cluster ................. 31 Segments ...................................... 194 Selecting the display unit ............... 204

SPORT handling mode Deactivating/activating (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 67 Warning lamp ................................. 246

Standing lamps Display message ............................ 226 Switching on/off ........................... 110

Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 141 Steering (display message) .............. 238

Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 101 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 101 Button overview ............................... 33 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 195 Cleaning ......................................... 286 Important safety notes .................. 100 Paddle shifters ............................... 152 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 106

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 152 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 208 Stowage areas ................................... 254 Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 255 Center console .............................. 255 Cup holders ................................... 256 Door ............................................... 255 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 255 Glove box ....................................... 254 Important safety information ......... 254 Rear wall ........................................ 255 Stowage net ................................... 256

Stowage net ....................................... 256 Summer tires ..................................... 310 Sun visor ............................................ 257 Surround lighting (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 205 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 133

T Tachometer ........................................ 195 Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 225 see Lights

Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 31

Technical data Capacities ...................................... 347 Emergency spare wheel ................. 342 Information .................................... 344 Tires/wheels ................................. 335 Vehicle data ................................... 352

TELEAID Call priority .................................... 263

16 Index

Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 264 Downloading routes ....................... 267 Emergency call .............................. 261 General notes ................................ 259 Geo fencing ................................... 267 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 266 MB info call button ........................ 263 Remote vehicle locking .................. 265 Roadside Assistance button .......... 262 Search & Send ............................... 264 Self-test ......................................... 260 Speed alert .................................... 267 System .......................................... 260 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 268 Vehicle Health Check .................... 266 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 265

Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 202 Display message ............................ 239 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 201 Number from the phone book ........ 202 Redialing ........................................ 202 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 202

Temperature Coolant .......................................... 195 Coolant (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 208 Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 208 Outside temperature ...................... 195 Setting (climate control) ................ 129 Transmission oil (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 208

Time see separate operating instructions

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 208 Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 316 Checking manually ........................ 315 Display message ............................ 234 Maximum ....................................... 314 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 294 Notes ............................................. 313 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 294 Recommended ............................... 311

Tire pressure loss warning system General notes ................................ 315 Important safety notes .................. 315 Restarting ...................................... 315

Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure elec- tronically ........................................ 318 Function/notes ............................. 316 General notes ................................ 316 Important safety notes .................. 316 Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... 319 Restarting ...................................... 318 Warning lamp ................................. 252 Warning message .......................... 318

TIREFIT kit .......................................... 292 Tire pressure not reached .............. 294 Tire pressure reached .................... 294

Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 329 Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 328 Bar (definition) ............................... 328 Changing a wheel .......................... 330 Characteristics .............................. 327 Checking ........................................ 309 Curb weight (definition) ................. 329 Definition of terms ......................... 327 Direction of rotation ...................... 330 Display message ............................ 234 Distribution of the vehicle occu- pants (definition) ............................ 330 DOT (Department of Transporta- tion) (definition) ............................. 328 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... 327 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... 328 General notes ................................ 335 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- inition) ........................................... 328 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) (definition) .............................. 328 Important safety notes .................. 308 Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... 328 Information on driving .................... 308 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 328

Index 17

Labeling (overview) ........................ 324 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 329 Load index ..................................... 326 Load index (definition) ................... 329 M+S tires ....................................... 310 Maximum load on a tire (defini- tion) ............................................... 329 Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... 328 Maximum permissible tire pres- sure (definition) ............................. 329 Maximum tire load ......................... 326 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 329 MOExtended tires .......................... 310 Optional equipment weight (defi- nition) ............................................ 329 Overview ........................................ 308 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- inition) ........................................... 329 Replacing ....................................... 330 Service life ..................................... 310 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 329 Speed rating (definition) ................ 328 Storing ........................................... 330 Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... 327 Summer tires ................................. 310 Temperature .................................. 323 TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... 329 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 329 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 329 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 328 Tire size (data) ............................... 335 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 324 Tire tread ....................................... 309 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 329 Total load limit (definition) ............. 330 Traction ......................................... 323 Traction (definition) ....................... 330 Tread wear ..................................... 323 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 322 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 328 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 330 Wheel and tire combination ........... 337

Wheel rim (definition) .................... 328 see Flat tire

Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 303 Important safety notes .................. 301 Installing the towing eye ................ 302 Removing the towing eye ............... 302

Towing away Important safety guidelines ........... 301 Installing the towing eye ................ 302 Removing the towing eye ............... 302 Transporting the vehicle ................ 303 With both axles on the ground ....... 302 With the rear axle raised ................ 303

Transmission Selector lever ................................ 148 see Automatic transmission

Transporting the vehicle .................. 303 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 286 Trip computer (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 197 Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 197 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 199

Trunk Emergency release .......................... 82 Important safety notes .................... 80 Locking separately ........................... 82 Opening (automatically from out- side) ................................................. 81 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 81 Overview .......................................... 80

Trunk lid Display message ............................ 238 Opening dimensions ...................... 352 Opening/closing .............................. 80

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 352 Trunk partition

Display message ............................ 238 General notes .................................. 88 Opening/closing .............................. 89

Turn signals Changing bulbs (front) ................... 116 Display message ............................ 225 Switching on/off ........................... 110

18 Index

Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 344 Installation ..................................... 344 Transmission output (maximum) .... 344

Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate

U Unlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 80 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 79

Upshift indicator (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 208

V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 258 Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 26 Data acquisition ............................... 27 Display message ............................ 236 Electronics ..................................... 344 Equipment ....................................... 22 Individual settings .......................... 204 Limited Warranty ............................. 26 Loading .......................................... 319 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 80 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 72 Lowering ........................................ 334 Maintenance .................................... 23 Parking for a long period ................ 163 Pulling away ................................... 142 Raising ........................................... 332 Reporting problems ......................... 26 Securing from rolling away ............ 331 Tow-starting ................................... 301 Towing away .................................. 301 Transporting .................................. 303 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 80 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 72 Vehicle data ................................... 352

Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle data ....................................... 352 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 352 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 80

Vehicle identification number see VIN

Vehicle identification plate .............. 345 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 290 Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 201 VIN ...................................................... 345

W Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 243 Brakes ........................................... 243 Check Engine ................................. 249 Coolant .......................................... 249 Distance warning ........................... 251 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 251 ESP .............................................. 245 ESP OFF ....................................... 246 Fuel tank ........................................ 249 Overview .......................................... 32 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 41 Reserve fuel ................................... 249 Restraint system ............................ 248 Seat belt ........................................ 242 SPORT handling mode ................... 246 Tire pressure monitor .................... 252

Warranty .............................................. 22 Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 239 Wheel and tire combinations

Tires ............................................... 337 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 334 Wheel chock ...................................... 331 Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 330 Checking ........................................ 309 Cleaning ......................................... 284 Emergency spare wheel ................. 339 General notes ................................ 335 Important safety notes .................. 308 Information on driving .................... 308 Interchanging/changing ................ 330 Mounting a new wheel ................... 334 Mounting a wheel .......................... 331 Overview ........................................ 308 Removing a wheel .......................... 333 Storing ........................................... 330

Index 19

Tightening torque ........................... 334 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 335

Wind screen Inserting and removing .................... 89 Preparing for installation .................. 89 see AIRGUIDE

Windows see Side windows

Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 131

Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 279 Notes ............................................. 351

Windshield wipers Display message ............................ 240 Problem (malfunction) ................... 120 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 118 Switching on/off ........................... 117

Winter driving Important safety notes .................. 310 Slippery road surfaces ................... 167 Snow chains .................................. 311

Winter operation Overview ........................................ 310

Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... 310

Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 285 Important safety notes .................. 118 Replacing ....................................... 118

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 286 Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Z ZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 130

20 Index

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- hensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmen- tally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. Ralways make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style: Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to of its maximum engine speed. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- tion.

Environmental concerns and recom- mendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regen- erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajor assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- ces, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint sys- tems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Introduction 21

Z

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel- evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been spe- cifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main- tain a supply of genuineMercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addi- tion, strategically located parts delivery cen- ters provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification num- ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes- Benz parts (Y page 345).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipment This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possi- ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all sys- tems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Warranty The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor- mation booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordancewith the followingwarranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty REmission System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control Sys- tem Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws)

Replacement parts and accessories are cov- ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces- sories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and War- ranty Information booklet, have an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and War- ranty Information booklet will be posted to you.

22 Introduction

Information for customers in Califor- nia Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a rea- sonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author- ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-

tion results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc- tion has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly noti- fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc- tion of a less serious nature than cate- gory (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Maintenance The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Always have the Service and Warranty Book- let with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser- vice advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Breakdown assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programoffers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis- tance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own- ership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim- ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- tance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con- tacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

Introduction 23

Z

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic convertermay not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic con- verter. Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs

carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/mainte- nance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigsmay ignite if they come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as inten- ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- tronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb or a hole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under- carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of

24 Introduction

an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on con- tinuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper- ation is subject to the following two condi- tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm- ful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired oper- ation. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com- pliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, includ- ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you connect equipment to the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos- tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equip- ment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test dur- ing the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the nec- essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali- fications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety.

Introduction 25

Z

Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- let. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifica- tions Rwork on electronic components

Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driv- ing your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rthe vehicle technical data Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles

Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con- tact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify- ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

26 Introduction

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current res- cue card contains the most important infor- mation about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under http:// portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/ content/asportal/en/communication/ informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data recording This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic information relating to vehicle operation,mal- functions, and user settings. This may include information about the performance or status of various systems, including but not limited to, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys- tems, that is stored and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the vehi- cle is serviced. The data obtained is used to properly diagnose and service your vehicle or to further optimize and develop vehicle func- tions.

COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicles operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehiclemay be compiled through COMAND or thembrace system. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in under- standing how a vehicles systems performed in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as during air bag deployment or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: Rhow various systems in your vehicle are operating Rwhether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling This data can help provide a better under- standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, can combine the EDR data with the type of per- sonal identification data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi- cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforce- ment, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Introduction 27

Z

("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia- bility arising from the extraction of this infor- mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per- sonnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local gov- ernment; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR com- ponent may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp- ted. This means that in the event of such con- flict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General information Information on license for free and open- source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the fol- lowing website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource

28 Introduction

Cockpit ................................................. 30 Instrument cluster .............................. 31 Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33 Center console .................................... 34 Overhead control panel ...................... 36 Door control panel .............................. 37

29

At a gl an ce

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shifters 152

; Combination switch 110

= Instrument cluster 31

? Horn

A PARKTRONIC warning dis- play 181

B Overhead control panel 36

C Climate control systems 122

D Ignition lock 139 Start/Stop button 140

Function Page

E Adjusts the steering wheel manually 100

F Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 100

G Cruise control lever 169

H Electric parking brake 161

I Diagnostics connection 25

J Opens the hood 276

K Light switch 108

30 Cockpit At

a gl an ce

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page

: Speedometer Speedometer segments 194

; Fuel gauge Fuel filler flap location indi- cator8: the fuel filler cap is on the right-hand side.

Function Page

= Tachometer 195

? Coolant temperature 195

A Multifunction display 196

B Instrument cluster lighting 194

i Information on displaying the outside temperature in the multifunction display can be found under "Outside temperature display" (Y page 195).

Instrument cluster 31

At a gl an ce

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: L Low-beam head- lamps 109

; T Parking lamps 110

= K High-beam head- lamps 110

? ESP 245

A F Electric parking brake (red) 248

B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 248

C Distance warning 251

D #! Turn signals 110

E h Tire pressure monitor 316

Function Page

F 6 Restraint system 40

G Seat belt 242

H M SPORT handling mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 246

I ? Coolant 249

J R Rear fog lamp 109

K ; Check Engine 249

L 8 Reserve fuel 249

M ESP OFF 245

N ! ABS 243

O $ Brakes 243

32 Instrument cluster At

a gl an ce

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 196

; COMAND display (see the separate operating instruc- tions)

= ?

Switches on the Voice Con- trol System (see the sepa- rate operating instructions)

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 201 Exits the telephone book/ redial memory 6

Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redialmem- ory WX

Adjusts the volume 8

Mute

Function Page

A =;

Selects a menu 195 9:

Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists 195 a

Confirms a selection 195 Hides display messages 211

B %

Back 195 Switches off the Voice Con- trol System (see the sepa- rate operating instructions)

Multifunction steering wheel 33

At a gl an ce

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: COMAND; see the separate operating instructions

; c Seat heating 99

= AIRSCARF 100

? c PARKTRONIC 181

A ECO start/stop func- tion 143

Function Page

B Hazard warning lamps 111

C 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG ON/OFF indicator lamp 41

D ESP 66

E Dynamic handling package with sports mode 178

34 Center console At

a gl an ce

Center console, lower section

Function Page

F Stowage compartment 254 Ashtray 258 Cigarette lighter 258 Socket 259

G Selector lever 148

H Cup holder 256

I Stowage compartmentwith Media Interface 254

Function Page

J Roof switch cover 87

K COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions

L Selects the drive pro- gram 152 Selects the drive pro- gram (Mercedes-AMG SLK 55) 152

Center console 35

At a gl an ce

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left- hand reading lamp on/off 113

; c Switches the interior lighting on/off 114

= Operates MAGIC SKY CONTROL 91

? p Switches the right- hand reading lamp on/off 113

A | Switches the auto- matic interior lighting con- trol on/off 113

B Eyeglasses compartment 255

Function Page

C MB Info call button (mbrace system) 263

D Rear-view mirror 103

E Buttons for the garage door opener 271

F F Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace sys- tem) 262

G G SOS button (mbrace system) 261

36 Overhead control panel At

a gl an ce

Door control panel

Function Page

: Opens the door 78

; %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 79

= Adjusts the seats electri- cally 98

? r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steer- ing wheel 106

A Folds the exteriormir- rors in/out 104

Function Page

B \ Selects the right exte- rior mirror 103

C W Opens/closes the right side window 83

D WOpens/closes the left side window 83

E 7 Adjusts the exterior mirrors 103

F Z Selects the left exte- rior mirror 103

Door control panel 37

At a gl an ce

38

Useful information .............................. 40 Panic alarm .......................................... 40 Occupant safety .................................. 40 Children in the vehicle ........................ 57 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 60 Driving safety systems ....................... 61 Protection against theft ..................... 69

39

Sa fe ty

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for at least one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed.

X To deactivate: press! button: again.

or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehi- cle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: RSeat belt system RAir bags The components of the restraint systemwork in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 43) Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 97).

As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the cor- rect driver's seat position (Y page 96). You also have tomake sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 46). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehi- cle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is suffi- cient, the air bags are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the out- side. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emer- gency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 54). For more information about children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint

40 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

systems, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57).

Important safety notes

G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function andmay fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information con- tact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).

Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is run- ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec- ted in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights upwhen the igni- tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNING If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unin- tentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer- gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam- ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp; are part of the Occupant Classifica- tion System (OCS). The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- ted. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

Occupant safety 41

Sa fe ty

Z

Depending on the person in the front- passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Clas- sification System (OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57). There youwill also find instructions on rear- ward and forward-facing child restraint sys- tems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the clas- sification of the person in the front- passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 49). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts (Y page 42) and "Air bags" (Y page 46). There you can also find infor- mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

Introduction Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occu- pants in the event of an accident or the vehi- cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi- cle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi- tion in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system comprises: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt force limiters

If the seat belt is pulled by the belt loop quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further.

The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the rout- ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters are synchronized with the front air bags which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is not occu- pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the Emergency Tensioning Device and front- passenger front air bag may be triggered and would need to be replaced.

Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- tems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey.

G WARNING If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can- not protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi- tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur- ing braking or when abruptly changing direc- tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

42 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Make sure that all vehicle occupants are seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt.

G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back- rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- ing or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

G WARNING Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- tional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas- tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, during braking or an abrupt change of direction. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint systems.

If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec- tion of this Operator's Manual (Y page 57) in addition to the child

restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classifica- tion system (OCS)" (Y page 49)

G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleach or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi- fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi- fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten- sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- ing an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Proper use of the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 42). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the jour- ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu- pants are always wearing the seat belt cor- rectly while the vehicle is in motion.

Occupant safety 43

Sa fe ty

Z

When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdo- men. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time. Infants and children must never travel sit- ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that there are never objects between a person and the seat, e.g. cush- ions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the notes in the "Stowage options/compart-

ments" section for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 254).

Fastening seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 43).

Basic illustration X Adjust the seat (Y page 96). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of belt loop = and engage belt tongue; into belt buckle:. The seat belt on the drivers seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically, see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 45).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body.

In order to attach the child restraint system securely in the vehicle, the seat belt on the front-passenger seat is equipped with a spe- cial seat belt retractor. Further information on the "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 58).

44 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Basic illustration X Press release button:, hold belt tongue; firmly and guide back towards belt loop=.

Seat belt adjustment AMG vehicles: the "seat-belt adjustment" function is not available. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and front- passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain retraction force if any slack is detected

between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 207).

Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driver's and front- passenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. This warning tone stops after six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is fastened. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and front- passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again.

i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi- cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" (Y page 242).

Occupant safety 45

Sa fe ty

Z

Air bags

Introduction The installation point of an air bag can be rec- ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. An air bag complements the correctly fas- tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protec- tion in applicable accident situations. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function inde- pendently from one another (Y page 54). However, no system available today can com- pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly andmaintain the great- est possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occu- pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.

ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out- side. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driv- ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may other- wise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth- erwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 41). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys- tem (OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre- vent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar.

46 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deploy- ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side windows. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it.

G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not per- formed correctly to the doors or door panel- ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door pan- eling carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air

bag; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer addi- tional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the driver's and front-passenger seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you of the status of the front- passenger front air bag (Y page 41). The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen- sor readings, detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied (Y page 49). The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit (Y page 49) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steer- ing column and front-passenger knee bag; under the glove box. The driver's and front- passenger knee bags are triggered together with the front air bags. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro- tection.

Side impact air bags

G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent the deployment of the air bags inte-

Occupant safety 47

Sa fe ty

Z

grated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the func- tion of the Occupant Classification System (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.

Side impact air bags: deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the front- passenger side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the front- passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci- dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy- ment is independent of whether the front- passenger seat is occupied or not.

Head bags

Head bags: deploy in the area of the side windows at the front. When deployed, the headbag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the: Rchest Rarms In the event of a side impact, the headbag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a headbagmay be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 54). The headbag on the front-passenger side does not deploy under the following condi- tions: ROCS has detected that the front-passenger seat is unoccupied. Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fas- tened.

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the headbag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situa- tion occurs. In this case, deployment is inde- pendent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

48 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front- passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag Rthe front-passenger head bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

Prerequisites To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi- ble

If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classi- fication, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- selves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion

If you install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint sys- tem. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the seat cushion of the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the forward- facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front- passenger seat. The child restraint systemmust not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-

rest and the head restraint position accord- ingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions.

Occupant Classification System opera- tion (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx- imately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- ted. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

Occupant safety 49

Sa fe ty

Z

If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag displaymessage appears in the instru- ment cluster (Y page 223). When the front- passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten- tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGERAIRBAGOFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the jour- ney.

G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front- passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the jour- ney, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct.

G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bag may deploy in an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problemswith the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 53).

G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte- rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON is lit up

This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt loop to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the belt loop. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

If OCS determines that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front- passenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelve months old, in a stand- ard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This

50 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up permanently after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classifi- cation is dependent on, among other fac- tors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. Make sure that the condi- tions for a correct classification are met. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is still lit, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible.

- If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of a stature correspond- ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indi- cates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi- cle" (Y page 57). When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instru- ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- ted in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the system checked by quali- fied technicians as soon as possible. Consult

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The front-passenger seat should only be repaired at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion is damaged, have the nec- essary repair work carried out at an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.

System self-test

G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The front- passenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceler- ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu- pant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

G DANGER If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective func- tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front- passenger seat.

Occupant safety 51

Sa fe ty

Z

That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dash- board. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a cor- rectly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the front- passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front- passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi- cation System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist work- shop.

G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS oper- ation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the forward- facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instal- lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON

indicator lamp display the status of the front- passenger front air bag (Y page 49). For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 53).

52 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 51).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit, even though the front- passenger seat is occu- pied by an adult or a person of a stature cor- responding to that of an adult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorrect. X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per- son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 49).

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on. The front-passenger seat is: Runoccupied Roccupied with the weight of a child up to twelve months old in a child restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat as pos- sible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If nec- essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front- passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off and/ or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Occupant safety 53

Sa fe ty

Z

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- tection and cannot provide the intended pro- tection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- ist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced.

For your own safety and that of your front passenger, it is important that you have deployed air bags replaced and faulty air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNING Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera- tional and are unable to perform their inten- ded protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- sioning Devices which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz- ardous situations. This procedure is reversi- ble. If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig- gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also

be released. The 6 restraint system warn- ing lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released gener- ally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory prob- lems. To avoid this, youmay wish to get out of the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it is safe to do so. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension- ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate- rial, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guide- lines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm.

Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates impor- tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler- ation or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a fron- tal or rear collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational; see "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 41) Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective seat

If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independ-

54 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

ently of each other in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags as well as driver's and front- passenger knee bags

The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The front- passenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi- cator lamp is lit. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 41). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of pro- pellant gas if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bag are deter- mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel- eration or acceleration which occurs at vari- ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre- emptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- tion and the direction of the force are essen- tially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- sion Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- cle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided

Factorswhich can only be seen andmeasured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of decel- eration is not high. Conversely, air bags may

be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon- gitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable components of the restraint sys- tem are activated independently of each other depending on the apparent type of acci- dent. RSide impact air bag on the side of impact, independently of the Emergency Tension- ing Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat The side impact air bag on the front- passenger side deploys under the following conditions: - the OCS system detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

RHead bag on the side of impact, independ- ently of the use of the seat belt and inde- pendently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the sys- tem determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation RHead bags on the driver's and front- passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system deter- mines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci- dent. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. How the air bag system works is deter- mined by the severity of the accident detec- ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of acci- dent: Rfrontal collision Rside impact Rrollover

Occupant safety 55

Sa fe ty

Z

NECK-PRO head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNING The function of the head restraint may be impaired if you: Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the head restraints, for example Ruse head restraint covers If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill their intended protective function in the event of an accident. In addition, objects attached to the head restraints could endanger other vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury. Do not attach any objects to the head restraints and do not use head restraint cov- ers.

Method of operation NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likeli- hood of head and chest injuries. The NECK- PRO head restraints on the driver's and front- passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards in the event of a rear-end collision of a certain severity. This provides better head support. If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered in an accident, you must reset the NECK-PRO head restraints on the drivers and front-passenger seat (Y page 56). Other- wise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end col- lision. You can recognize when NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered by the fact that they have moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the NECK-PRO head restraints checked for functionality at a qualified specialist work- shop after a rear-end collision.

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints

Do not insert your finger between the uphols- tery of the head restraint and the seat. Pay particular attention while resetting the NECK- PRO head restraints. X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow:.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down as far as it will go in the direction of arrow;.

X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direction of arrow= until the cushion engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint.

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have diffi- culty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection system)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. AMG vehicles: PRE-SAFE is not available. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

56 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Important safety notes

! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a dan- ger that the seats and/or objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE is activated.

Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE- SAFE, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

Function

PRE-SAFE intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Ron vehicles with the Driving Assistance package: if BAS PLUS intervenes power- fully or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain sit- uations

PRE-SAFE takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detec- ted: Rthe seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. Rvehicles with the memory function: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position. Rvehicles with the memory function: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position.

If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE slackens the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE can then be reversed.

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE convenience function. You will find information on the convenience func- tion under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 45).

Automatic measures after an acci- dent Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rvehicles with a memory function: the elec- trically adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel sup- ply is cut off Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer- gency call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to

Children in the vehicle 57

Sa fe ty

Z

the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classifica- tion System (OCS)" (Y page 49)

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- dren may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit- ting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 43). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fas- tened without a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retrac- tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten- tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly.

The seat belt on the front passenger's side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retrac- tor ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken once the child seat is secured. Installing a child restraint system: X Make sure you observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instruc- tions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the belt loop.

X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor: X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is enabled.

X Push the child restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

58 Children in the vehicle Sa fe ty

Removing the child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor: X Make sure you observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instruc- tions.

X Press the release button of the seat belt buckle, hold the belt tongue and guide it back towards the belt loop. The special seat belt retractor is deactiva- ted.

Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- tems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incor- rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cush- ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incor- rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a

sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, strik- ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems prop- erly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

Further information on stowing objects, lug- gage and loads securely can be found under Stowing options/stowage compartments (Y page 254).

G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing sys- tems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- ing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again.

The securing system of child restraint sys- tems is the seat belt system.

i If you install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to read and follow the information on the "Occu- pant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 49). There you will also find infor- mation on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag.

All child restraint systems must meet the fol- lowing standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand- ards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2

Children in the vehicle 59

Sa fe ty

Z

Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are inclu- ded with the child restraint system. Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte- rior and on the child restraint system.

Child restraint system on the front- passenger seat

General notes If you install a child restraint system onto the front-passenger seat, always observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occu- pant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 49). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front- passenger front air bag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash- board

Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a rear- ward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 41) is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva- ted. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint systemmust lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint sys- tem must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the front-passenger seat belt loop to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the front-passenger seat belt loop. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi- cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- cle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans- port box.

60 Pets in the vehicle Sa fe ty

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 61) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 62) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (distance warning function and Adaptive Brake Assist) (Y page 62) RESP (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 65) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 69) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 69)

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for stay- ing in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather condi- tions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. (Y page 308). Inwintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehi- cle when braking. The!ABSwarning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi- tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking charac- teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- ally, further driving safety systems are deac- tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- ding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 243) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 212).

Braking X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit- uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal.

Driving safety systems 61

Sa fe ty

Z

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- tion of hazardous road conditions, and func- tions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General information BAS operates in emergency braking situa- tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

Braking X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

General information COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS con- sists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and Adaptive Brake Assist. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end

collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.

Important safety notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COL- LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Observe the notes in the section on break- ing-in (Y page 138).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi- cle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- sions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Activating or deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is activated after every ignition cycle. You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PREVEN- TION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer (Y page 203). When deactivated, the dis- tance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated.

62 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphics display.

Distance warning function

General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 61).

The distancewarning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obsta- cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically. Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles.

Important safety notes G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function.

Detection of hazardous situations can be par- ticularly impaired by: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COL- LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Observe the important safety notes in the "Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 138).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi- cle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- sions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front.

or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving condi- tions may also cause the system to display a warning.

Driving safety systems 63

Sa fe ty

Z

Function Starting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front.

or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving condi- tions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obsta- cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, COLLI- SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function: Rgives the driver more time to react to criti- cal driving situations Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rreduces the effects of an accident If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated simultaneously.

Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects

Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the auton- omous braking function is available in the fol- lowing speed ranges: R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving objects R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects

Due to the nature of the system, complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the Autonomous Braking function to intervene.

Adaptive Brake Assist

General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col- lision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a colli- sion. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap- tive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis- tance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation.

64 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa- tions. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily Rnot intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving condi- tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter- vene.

If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. Detection of hazardous situations can be par- ticularly impaired by: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles after the first few kilometers of driving or after the COLLISION PREVEN- TION ASSIST PLUS system has been serv- iced Observe the important safety notes in the "Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 138).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi- cle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- sions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

ESP monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP assists the driver when

Driving safety systems 65

Sa fe ty

Z

pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

ETS traction control is part of ESP. ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. ETS remains active when you deactivate ESP.

i Mercedes-AMG vehicles: your vehicle may be equipped with 20-inch tires on the rear axle. After changing to 19 inch wheels, ETSmay intervene noticeably earlier during the first few kilometers. After approx- imately 10 km ETS will function as usual again. Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found in the "Wheel/tire combina- tions" section (Y page 335).

Important safety notes

G WARNING If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- ing safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

When towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised, observe the notes on ESP (Y page 303). ESP is only deactivated if the warning lamp is lit continuously. If the warning lamp and the warn- ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP not avail- able due to a malfunction.

Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 245) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 212).

i Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP function properly.

Characteristics of ESP

General information If the ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP is auto- matically active. If ESP intervenes, the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP intervenes: X Do not deactivate ESP under any circum- stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail- ing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automati- callywhen the driverwants to pull away again. ESP remains in its previously selected sta- tus.Example: if ESPwas deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP (except MercedesAMG vehicles)

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

66 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

You can select between the following states of ESP: RESP is activated. RESP is deactivated.

G WARNING If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP in the fol- lowing situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel

i Activate ESP as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi- cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP

X To deactivate: press button:. The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

X To activate: press button:. The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP is deactivated If ESP is deactivated and one ormorewheels start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa- tions, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP: RESP no longer improves driving stability. Rengine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- ting action for better traction on loose sur- faces. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP still provides support when you brake firmly.

Deactivating/activating ESP (MercedesAMG vehicles)

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

You can select between the following states of ESP: RESP is activated. RSPORT handling mode is activated. RESP is deactivated.

G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and acci- dents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit- uations described in the following.

G WARNING If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- bed in the following.

Driving safety systems 67

Sa fe ty

Z

In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeer- ing characteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver.

i Activate ESP as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi- cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP

X To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button:. TheM SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button:. TheM SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP: press button: until the ESP OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The OFFmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display.

X To activate ESP: briefly press button:. The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ESP ONmessage appears in themultifunc- tion display.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han- dling mode If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP only improves driving stability to a limited degree. Rtraction control is still activated. Rengine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- ting action for better traction on loose sur- faces. Rthe engine's torque is restricted only to a limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. RESP still provides support when you brake firmly.

Characteristics when ESP is deactivated If ESP is deactivated and one ormorewheels start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa- tions, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP: RESP no longer improves driving stability. Rengine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin.

68 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- ting action for better traction on loose sur- faces. Rtraction control is still activated. RPRE-SAFE is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP intervenes. RPRE-SAFE Brake is no longer available, it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP intervenes. RESP still provides support when you brake firmly.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)

General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- sure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 61).

G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 243) as well as dis- play messages (Y page 214).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addi-

tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 179) and hill start assist (Y page 142).

Protection against theft

Immobilizer X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activatewith KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The engine can be started by anyone with a valid SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be star- ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Protection against theft 69

Sa fe ty

Z

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys- tem is armed after approximately 15 seconds.

X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood Rthe glove box Rthe stowage space under the armrest X To turn the alarmoffwith the SmartKey: press the% or& button on the SmartKey. The alarm is switched off.

or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The Smart- Key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off.

or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash- board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example.

i If the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Cus- tomer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the mes- sage or data provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser- vice. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available.

70 Protection against theft Sa fe ty

Useful information .............................. 72 SmartKey ............................................. 72 Doors .................................................... 78 Trunk .................................................... 80 Side windows ...................................... 83 Roof ...................................................... 86

71

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey.

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle ; F To unlock the trunk lid = % To unlock the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press the% but- ton. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rprotection against theft is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

72 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe trunk lid Rthe stowage compartment in the center console Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 206). When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 205).

KEYLESS-GO

General notes Bear inmind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY- LESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GOwith those of a con- ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the& button on the SmartKey. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). A checkwhich periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart- Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile the vehicle is in motion

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur- face:.

X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface; for an exten- ded period. Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 85).

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on the trunk lid. The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid.

Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the& button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp (Y page 75) of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.

X To activate: press any button on the SmartKey or insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea- tures are available again.

SmartKey 73

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. Thismeans only the driver's door, the lockable stowage compartments in the vehi- cle interior and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the% and& buttons simulta- neously for about six seconds until the bat- tery indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 75). i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehi- cle, pressing the& or% button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock: press the% button once. X To unlock centrally: press the% but- ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol- lows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur- face of the front-passenger door handle.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the% and& buttons simultaneously for approximately six sec- onds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 75).

Mechanical key

General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 69). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X To deactivate the alarm with the key: press the% or& button on the key.

or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS- GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni- tion lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS- GO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.

If you unlock the vehicle using themechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

74 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

X Push release catch: in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about: Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 80) Runlocking the trunk (Y page 82) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 80)

Inserting the mechanical key

X Push mechanical key; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch: is back in its basic position. Push mechanical key; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and the release catch is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seekmedical attention immediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling

and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/Hazard- ousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp: lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 75). If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the& or% button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 74).

SmartKey 75

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

X Pressmechanical key; into the SmartKey opening in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover: opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover: closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter- minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compart- ment cover: into the housing and then press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the Smart- Key (Y page 74).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.

76 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 75) and replace it if nec- essary (Y page 75).

If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. To do this, hold the key as close as possible to the vehicle and press the% or& button.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a Smart- Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work- shop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the mechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

SmartKey 77

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey.

the on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 298).

or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 299). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be started using KEYLESS- GO. The SmartKey is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked. X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

Unlocking and opening doors from the inside ! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side win- dows have iced up. It will then not be pos- sible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door closed. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window.

You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle was previously locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening the vehicle from the inside will activate the anti- theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 69).

78 Doors Op

en in g an d cl os in g

X Pull door handle;. If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened.

i When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window closes again.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. For example, you can unlock the front-passenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away.

X To unlock: press button:. X To lock: press button;. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks.

The central locking/unlocking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or the stowage compartment in the center console.

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or Rif the vehicle was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre- viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

: Deactivating ; Activating X To deactivate: press and hold button: for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning.

Doors 79

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

You could therefore lock yourself out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board com- puter (Y page 206).

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan- ical key) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 69). X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 74).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position1. The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart- Key (Y page 74).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.

X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door and the trunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 79). X Check whether the locking knob on the front-passenger door is still visible. Press the locking knob down by hand, if neces- sary.

X Close the driver's door. X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 74).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

1 To lock X Turn themechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart- Key (Y page 74).

If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip

80 Trunk Op

en in g an d cl os in g

over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- den change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

! Only close the trunk once the roof is low- ered completely. Otherwise, you could damage the roof. If you close the trunk lid before the roof is lowered completely, the loading aid switch lights up and a warning tone sounds.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid (Y page 352).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The trunk lid can be: Ropened/closed from outside Ropened automatically from outside Rlocked separately Runlocked with the mechanical key Ropened with the emergency release button

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

X Press the% button on the key. X Pull handle:. X Raise the trunk lid.

Closing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess:. X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the& button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS- GO.

If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and will open again.

Opening automatically from outside

General notes

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid (Y page 352).

Opening You can open the trunk lid automatically using the handle in the trunk lid. X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid handle and let it go again immediately.

Trunk 81

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closing fea- ture: the trunk lid can be also be opened automatically using the SmartKey. X Press and hold theF button on the key until the trunk lid opens.

Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the trunk lid. X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 74).

1 Basic position 2 To lock X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from position1 to position2.

X Remove the mechanical key. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 74).

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key) ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani- cal key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 69). X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 74).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as it will go.

1 Basic position 2 To unlock X Turn the mechanical key from position1 counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position2.

X Pull the trunk lid handle. The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position 1 and remove it.

X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 74).

Trunk emergency release You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside with the emergency release button.

82 Trunk Op

en in g an d cl os in g

X Press emergency release button: briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. The trunk lid emergency release does not unlock the trunk lid if the battery is discon- nected or discharged. Trunk lid emergency release light: Remergency release button: flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened Remergency release button: flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side win- dow and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side win- dow during the opening procedure. If some- body becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.

G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Side window reversing feature The front side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts one of the front side win- dows from traveling upwards during the auto- matic closing process, the sidewindow opens again automatically. During the manual clos- ing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing a side window.

G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these sit- uations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win- dows in the front The switches for the front side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch for the front-passenger side window on the front-passenger door. The switches on the driver's door take prec- edence.

Side windows 83

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

: Left ; Right X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X To openmanually: press and hold the cor- responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started.

X To closemanually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it.

X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the corresponding switch again.

You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Opening and closing all side windows

Using the switch on the center console You can use the switch on the center console to close all side windows simultaneously. X Open the cover in the lower center console. The switch for all side windows is under the cover.

X To open all side windows: press but- ton: to the point of resistance.

X To open all side windows fully: press switch: beyond the point of resistance. All side windows open simultaneously. i If, after opening the windows, you then close a side window using the switch on the door control panel, the other side windows will remain open. To close the other side windows, you must pull the switch on the center console and hold it. The front side window will close first, then the rear side windows.

X To close all side windows: pull switch:. The rear side windows close after the front side windows.

X Make sure that all the side windows are fully closed.

When the roof is open, only the two front side windows can be operated using the switch on the center console.

Using the SmartKey

G WARNING When using the convenience closing feature, parts of the body could be trapped in the clos- ing area when a side window is being closed. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is oper- ating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.

84 Side windows Op

en in g an d cl os in g

If someone is trapped: X Release the& button immediately. X Press and hold the% button until the side windows open again.

You can use the SmartKey to open or close all side windows simultaneously. X Close the roof (Y page 87). X Open the trunk partition (Y page 88). X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle.

X To open all sidewindows: press the% button on the key until the side windows are fully opened.

X To interrupt the opening procedure: release the% button.

X To close all sidewindows: press the& button on the key until the side windows are fully closed.

X To interrupt the closing procedure: release the& button.

Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO

G WARNING When using the convenience closing feature, parts of the body could be trapped in the clos- ing area when a side window is being closed. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is oper- ating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.

If someone is trapped: X Release the recessed sensor surface on the door handle immediately.

X Pull the door handle immediately and hold it until the side windows open again.

With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side win- dows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on the door handle until the side windows are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sen- sor surface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows are closed.

X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface: on the door handle.

Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is com- pletely closed (Y page 83).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side win- dow is completely closed (Y page 83).

X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

Side windows 85

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.

X Remove the objects. X Close the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you can- not see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Roof

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short time. This causes the soft top to lower unex- pectedly and may cause you or others to be trapped. There is a risk of injury. Always open or close the soft top completely.

G WARNING Closing the roof manually is a complicated and technically demanding procedure, which requires a lot of strength. You or others can become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Only have the soft top closed manually at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Never sit on the rear shelf or store heavy objects there. You will otherwise damage the roof and the rear shelf of your vehicle.

! Do not forget that the weather can change abruptly. Make certain that the roof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior.

! When opening and closing the roof, make sure that:

86 Roof Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Rthere is sufficient clearance, as the roof swings upwards. Rthere is sufficient clearance behind the vehicle, as the trunk lid swings back- wards beyond the bumper. Rthe trunk is only loaded to below the trunk partition. Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up by the load. Rthe trunk partition is closed. Rthe trunk lid is closed. Rthe outside temperature is above 5 (15 ).

You could otherwise damage the roof, trunk and other parts of the vehicle.

i Vehicle dimensions when opening/clos- ing the roof (Y page 352).

i Make sure that the roof and rear window are clean and dry before opening the roof. Otherwise, water or dirt could enter the vehicle interior or trunk.

Opening and closing using the roof switch

Important safety notes

G WARNING When opening or closing the roof, body parts could be trapped by, for example, the roof mechanism, trunk lid or side windows. There is a risk of injury. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving components. If someone becomes trapped, release the button.

Opening and closing

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).

X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89). X Close the trunk lid. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock.

X Open the cover in the lower center console. Roof switch: is located under the cover.

X To open: pull roof switch: until the entire roof is stowed away in the trunk. You see the Vario-Roof in Operation message in the multifunction display. Once the opening procedure is complete, the message disappears and a tone will sound. All of the side windows open.

X To close: press and hold soft-top switch: until the soft top is fully closed. You see the Vario-Roof in Operation message in the multifunction display. Once the opening procedure is complete, the message disappears and a tone will sound. All of the side windows open.

X To close all side windows, pull the switch under the cover of the center console (Y page 84).

If you operate the roof switch and the Trunk Partition Open message appears in the multifunction display, the trunk partition has not been closed correctly.

Roof 87

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Opening and closing using the Smart- Key

Important safety notes

G WARNING When opening or closing the roof, body parts could be trapped by, for example, the roof mechanism, trunk lid or side windows. There is a risk of injury. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving components. If someone becomes trapped, release the button.

Opening and closing X Close the trunk partition (Y page 88). X Close the trunk lid (Y page 80). X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle.

X To open: press and hold the% button on the key until the roof is fully opened. The roof and the rear side windows open. The front side windows close.

X To interrupt the opening procedure: release the% button.

X To open the front side windows: press the% button on the key again.

X To close: press and hold the& button on the key until the roof is fully closed. The roof and the side windows close.

X To interrupt the closing procedure: release the& button.

When the roof is closed and the trunk parti- tion is open, the roof cannot be opened using the SmartKey functions. Instead, all of the side windows open or close simultaneously (Y page 84). Additionally, the Trunk Parti tion Open message appears in the multi- function display.

Locking the roof again

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short time. This causes the soft top to lower unex- pectedly and may cause you or others to be trapped. There is a risk of injury. Always open or close the soft top completely.

The roof is not locked if: RtheK symbol and the Vario-Roof in Operation message appear in the multi- function display RtheK symbol and the Open/Close Vario-Roof Completely message appear and you hear a warning tone. Ryou hear a warning tone for up to 10 sec- onds when pulling away or while driving.

Locking You can lock the roof again if it is not locked fully. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the roof switch (Y page 87).

Trunk partition

General notes

! To avoid damaging the roof or luggage when folding back the roof, you should: Ronly load the trunk to below the trunk partition Rnot place any objects on or in front of the trunk partition

88 Roof Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Rnot place any objects on the cover behind the roll bars Rnot allow the cargo to push the trunk partition upwards

The trunk partition can be used to cover lug- gage and loads in the trunk.

Opening and closing

X To close: pull back trunk partition: by the handle in the direction of the arrow until it engages on both sides in the eyelets on the cargo compartment lip.

X To open: grip the handle of trunk parti- tion:.

X Press the release button in the handle of trunk partition:. Trunk partition: is unlocked.

X Pull trunk partition: up out of the eyelets on the cargo compartment lip.

X Push trunk partition: forwards against the direction of the arrow by handle.

Wind screen

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you use the wind screen in darkness or in other conditions offering poor visibility, your view to the rear is further impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the wind screen when visibility con- ditions are good.

G WARNING If the wind screen is incorrectly installed, it could detach itself during a journey and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Install the wind screen as described.

! Install or remove the wind screen only when the roof is open. You could otherwise damage thewind screen or the vehicle inte- rior.

The wind screen offers protection from the wind when driving with the roof down. The wind screen can be installed or removed from the driver's side or passenger side. For operations involving the wind screen, it is preferable to be positioned on the side of the vehicle facing away from the traffic, after stopping the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Installing and removing thewind screen

Preparing for installation

Preparing for installation from the left side of the vehicle (example) : Wind screen ; Locked latch = Unlocked latch X The following conditions must be fulfilled for installation:

Roof 89

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Runlocking buttons R and L point in the direction of travel. Rlatch= facing you is unlocked. Rlatch; facing away from you is locked.

X To unlock the latch: press unlocking but- ton R or L on the locked latch.

X To lock the latch: push the unlocked latch upwards by hand until it engages.

Installing

Installation from the left side of the vehicle (exam- ple) X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Take the wind screen out of the trunk. X Prepare for installing (Y page 89). X Hold wind screen: at an angle and slide it with locked latch; in the direction of arrow? into the bracket of the opposite roll bar.

X Press wind screen: on the side of the vehicle facing you downwards in the direc- tion of arrowA until it engages. Make sure that studsB and latch= fit into the respective brackets.

X Check whether wind screen: is fully inserted into all four brackets and is sitting securely.

X If this is not the case, remove wind screen: again and repeat the steps above.

Removing

Removing from the left side of the vehicle (exam- ple) X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Press unlocking button L:. Meanwhile, pull wind screen; on the side of the vehi- cle facing you upwards and tilt it.

Removing from the left side of the vehicle (exam- ple) X Pull wind screen; out of the bracket of the opposite roll bar in the direction of the arrow.

X Secure wind screen; to the trunk floor by the rubber strips (Y page 256).

AIRGUIDE

Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle if you fold AIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident.

90 Roof Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Only fold AIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicle is stationary.

! AIRGUIDE can only be positioned cor- rectly by folding it in or out. AIRGUIDE can- not be dismantled. Do not try to remove AIRGUIDE from its anchorage. Otherwise, you could damage AIRGUIDE or the vehicle.

AIRGUIDE can be folded out or back in from the driver's side or passenger side. When operating AIRGUIDE, preferably stand on the side of the vehicle away from the traf- fic, after you have stopped the vehicle in accordance with road and traffic conditions.

Operating AIRGUIDE

Example: folding out from the left side of the vehi- cle X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X To fold out AIRGUIDE: turn disc: in the direction of the arrow towards themiddle of the vehicle to the stop.

X Repeat with disc;. X To fold in AIRGUIDE: turn discs: and; back behind the roll bar to the stop.

i Discs: and; can also be used inde- pendently of each other, e.g. when you are driving without a passenger.

MAGIC SKY CONTROL

General notes MAGIC SKY CONTROL is a glass roof, the transparency of which can be changed by applying electrical voltage. MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched between darkened and transparent states. MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automatically when you turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove the key.

Risk of electric shock

G DANGER MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high voltage. If the trim behind the overhead con- trol panel is damaged or removed, electrical components will be exposed. If you touch these components, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. RNever remove the trim behind the overhead control panel. RIf the trim is damaged, never touch the electrical components behind it. RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CON- TROL carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

The electrical components of MAGIC SKY CONTROL are protected by a paneling behind the overhead control panel. The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit is marked with a yellow warning sticker that warns you of high voltage. The electric cables of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are orange in color.

Roof 91

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the sta- tus it was set to before the engine was switched off.

X To change the degree of transparency: press button:.

At sub-zero temperatures, the change is slower and uneven. The entire process may take some time.

92 Roof Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Problems with the roof

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The roofwill not open or close.

The trunk partition is not closed and not properly engaged. X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89).

The trunk lid is open. X Close the trunk lid (Y page 81).

The on-board voltage is too low. X Leave the engine running.

The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roof drive has been automatically deactivated. You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten minutes. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

The automatic roof mechanism is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Roof 93

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

94

Useful information .............................. 96 Correct driver's seat position ............ 96 Seats .................................................... 97 Steering wheel .................................. 100 Mirrors ............................................... 103 Memory function ............................... 106

95

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 97).

X Make sure that seat= is adjusted prop- erly. Manual seat adjustment (Y page 98) Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 98)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly X Check whether the head restraint is adjus- ted properly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety notes on steering col- umn adjustment (Y page 100).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjus- ted properly. Adjusting the steering wheel man- ually(Y page 101) Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 101)

When adjusting the steering wheel column, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instru- ment cluster clearly

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 42).

X Check whether you have fastened seat belt; properly (Y page 44).

96 Correct driver's seat position Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoul- der Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir- ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 103) in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions.

X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings (Y page 106).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 46) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57).

G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle.

G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- ment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys- tem.

G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro- tection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints instal- led. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat

Seats 97

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating mate- rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov- ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be dam- aged.

i The head restraints are equipped with the NECK-PRO system (Y page 56). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the seats. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Adjusting the seats manually

X To set seat fore-and-aft adjustment: lift lever: and slide the seat forwards or backwards.

X Release lever: again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position.

X To adjust the backrest angle: relieve the pressure on the backrest.

X Pull handle; and adjust the backrest to the desired angle.

X Release handle; again. The backrest must audibly engage.

X To adjust the seat height: pull handle= upwards or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height.

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Backrest angle ; Seat fore-and-aft adjustment = Seat cushion angle ? Seat height

i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 106).

Adjusting the head restraints

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

98 Seats Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

X To raise/lower: push the head restraint upwards or pull it down into the desired position.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: To raise the backrest contour ; To soften the backrest contour = To lower the backrest contour ? To harden the backrest contour You can adjust the contour of the seat backr- ests individually to provide optimum support for your back.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high tempera-

tures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

Seats 99

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Problems with the seat heating The seat heating has switched off prema- turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

X Once the battery is sufficiently charged, switch on the seat heating again.

AIRSCARF

Switching on/off

G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot.

The AIRSCARF function warms the head and neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air. Thewarmair flows out of the holes in the head restraints. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button:. Three red indicator lamps in the button light up. The blower starts up after a preheating phase of seven seconds.

X Press button: repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

i The blower continues running for seven seconds to cool down the heating ele- ments.

i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF may switch off.

Problems with AIRSCARF AIRSCARF has switched off prematurely or will not switch on. The vehicle's electrical sys- tem voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

X Switch on AIRSCARF again.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

100 Steering wheel Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel man- ually

G WARNING If the steering wheel is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion.

: Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment) X Push release lever: down completely in the direction of the arrow. The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.

X Push release lever: up completely. The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction.

Adjusting the steering wheel electri- cally

: To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 101) RStoring settings (Y page 106)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.

G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle

Steering wheel 101

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

occupants particularly children could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- ing adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust- ment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- ing adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat and the steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rpress one of the memory function memory buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust- ment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNING If you use openings in the bodywork or detachable parts as steps, you could: Rslip and/or fall Rdamage the vehicle and cause yourself to fall.

There is a risk of injury. Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita- ble ladder.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASY- ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com- puter (Y page 206).

Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel swings upwards when you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in position 1 Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv- ing The steering wheel is moved to the last selec- ted position when: Rthe driver's door is closed Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock or Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is also automatically moved to the previously set position. The last position of the steering wheel is stored when you switch off the ignition or when you store the setting with the memory function (Y page 106).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-

102 Steering wheel Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

tion of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea- ture is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 206).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever: forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear.

This means that you could misjudge the dis- tance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci- dent. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press button: for the left-hand exterior mirror or button; for the right-hand exte- rior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button= as long as the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, to the right or to the left. The exteriormirrormust be set to a position that provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. The exterior mirrors are automatically heated after starting the vehicle if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside tem- perature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to 10 minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors manually by switching on the rear window defroster.

Mirrors 103

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button:. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 207): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the out- side. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat- ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

i The exterior mirrors do not fold out if they have been folded in manually.

Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors:move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exte- rior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding

button: until you hear a click and then the mirrors engage in position (Y page 104). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 103).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, res- piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following: RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti- glaremode if the following conditions aremet simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on and Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior light- ing is switched on.

104 Mirrors Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Parking position for the exterior mir- ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this posi- tion. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press button; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side returns to the driving posi- tion.

Using the memory button

You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M?. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X With the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side activated, use adjustment button= to adjust the exterior mirror. In the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curb should be visible.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of the arrows on adjustment button= within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set- ting

Mirrors 105

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock.

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rif you press button: for the exterior mir- ror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNING If you use thememory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING When thememory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu- pants particularly children could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjust- ments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme- diately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNING Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Thememory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the igni- tion lock. With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three dif- ferent people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rdriver's side: steering wheel position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir- rors on the driver's and front-passenger sides

X Adjust the seat electrically (Y page 98). X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 101) and the exteriormirrors (Y page 103).

X Press memory button M and one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected pre- set position. A tone sounds when the set- tings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant storage posi- tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button.

106 Memory function Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Useful information ............................ 108 Exterior lighting ................................ 108 Interior lighting ................................. 113 Replacing bulbs ................................. 114 Windshield wipers ............................ 117

107

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

Exterior lighting

General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some coun- tries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obli- gations.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using: Rthe light switch Rthe combination switch (Y page 110) Rthe on-board computer (Y page 205)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting 4 Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps B R Rear fog lamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to. The exterior lighting (except the parking/ standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0

Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to, the low- beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L.

108 Exterior lighting Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected accord- ing to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather con- ditions such as fog, snow or spray): RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have acti- vated the daytime running lamps function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beamheadlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to.

Only for Canada: The daytime running lamps improve the visi- bility of your vehicle during the day. The day- time running lamps function is required by law inCanada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if youmove the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to T, the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. USA only: The daytime running lamps improve the visi- bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 205).

If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.

Low-beam headlamps G WARNING When the light switch is set to, the low- beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L.

Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L. The greenL indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the country- specific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps. X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Exterior lighting 109

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

Parking lamps ! If the battery has been excessively dis- charged, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T parking lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT. The greenT indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up.

Standing lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina- ted. X To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left

X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow; or?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times.

X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow; or?.

High-beam headlamps X To switch on manually: turn the Smart- Key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine.

X Vehicles without Adaptive Highbeam Assist: turn the light switch to L or .

X Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: turn the light switch to L.

X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow:. In the position, the high-beam head- lamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it automatically controls activation of the high- beam headlamps (Y page 112).

High-beam flasher X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine.

X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow=.

110 Exterior lighting Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps: press button:. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corre- sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps: press button:.

The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Ran air bag is deployed or Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto- matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu- mination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better vis- ibility in tight bends, for example. The corner- ing light function can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.

Active light function

The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steer- ing movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while

Exterior lighting 111

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

driving. This allows you to identify pedes- trians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes

You can use this function to set the head- lamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approach- ing from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. The system automatically adapts the low- beam headlamp range depending on the dis- tance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac- tivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes

G WARNING Adaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognize road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic high- beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off X To switch on: turn the light switch to. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow:. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc- tion display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam head- lamps. If you are driving at speeds above approx- imately 16 mph (25 km/h):

112 Exterior lighting Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approx- imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected: The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approx- imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit: The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit.

X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc- tion display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Overhead control panel : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior

lighting control on/off = p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/off ? c Switches the interior lighting on/off

Interior lighting control

General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The color and brightness of the ambient light- ing may be set using the on-board computer (Y page 205).

Automatic interior lighting control X To activate/deactivate: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting con- trol is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel.

Interior lighting 113

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the igni- tion lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 206).

Manual interior lighting control X To switch the interior lighting on/off: press the c button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button.

or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

Xenon bulbs

G DANGER Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get an electric shock if you remove the cover of the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con- tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. Never touch the parts or the electrical con- tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, you can recognize this by the following: the cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the engine. For this to be observed, the lights must be switched on before starting the engine. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou touch it Rit is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the same type and the specified volt- age. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during opera- tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 115). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

114 Replacing bulbs Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

If you require assistance changing bulbs, con- sult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

Halogen headlamps : Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W = Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W

Bi-Xenon headlamps : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Tail lamp : Backup lamp: W 16 W

Changing the front bulbs

Removing/mounting the cover in the front wheel housing

X To remove: switch off the lights. X Turn the front wheels inwards. X Slide cover: up and remove it. X To install: insert cover: again and slide down until it engages.

Replacing bulbs 115

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

Low-beam headlamps (halogen head- lamps)

X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous- ing (Y page 115).

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise and pull it out.

X Press retainer; up. X Remove connector= with the bulb. X Pull the bulb out of connector=. X Insert the new bulb into connector= and into bracket for retainer;. Make sure the bulb is positioned correctly.

X Press retainer; down. X Attach housing cover: and turn it clock- wise until it engages.

X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous- ing (Y page 115).

High-beam headlamps (halogen head- lamps)/cornering lamps (Bi-Xenon headlamps)

X Switch off the lights. X Open the hood. X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise and pull it out.

X At the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards, disconnect it and pull it out of bulb holder;.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;, push it down and secure it in place.

X Attach housing cover: and turn it clock- wise until it engages.

Side marker lamps (halogen head- lamps) Due to their location, have the bulbs in the side marker lamp changed at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Turn signals (halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights. X Open the hood. X Turn bulb holder: counter-clockwise and pull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder:. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder:. X Insert bulb holder: and turn it clockwise until it engages.

116 Replacing bulbs Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Changing the rear bulbs

Backup Light

X Switch off the lights. X Make sure that the roof is closed. X Open the trunk. X Turn and pull out buffer stop;. X Unclip catch: for side paneling=.

X Reach upwards into side paneling=, loosen and pull downwards until holder? of the backup lamp is easily accessible.

X Pull out bulb holder?. X Pull out the bulb. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder?. X Insert holder? until it engages. X re-install side paneling= precisely. X Clip in catch: for side paneling=. X Push in and tighten buffer stop;.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes placewhen the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on thewindshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the wind- shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Combination switch 1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)

Windshield wipers 117

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

3 Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity)

4 Continuous wipe, slow 5 Continuous wipe, fast B Single wipe/ Wipes the wind-

shield using washer fluid X Switch on the ignition. X Turn the combination switch to the corre- sponding position.

In the or position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically accord- ing to the intensity of the rain. In the position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the position, causing the wind- shield wiper to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic condi- tions.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the wind- shield. Never fold awindshieldwiper armwithout a wiper blade back onto the windshield. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the

windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always position the windshield wiper arms vertically before folding them away from the windshield. By doing so, you will avoid damage to the hood.

Replacing the wiper blades

Removing the wiper blades X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139).

X Set the windshield wiper to position . X When the wiper arms have reached the ver- tical position, turn the SmartKey to position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock (Y page 139).

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield.

X Press both release clips;. X Fold wiper blade: in the direction of arrow= away from wiper arm?.

X Remove wiper blade: in the direction of arrowA.

118 Windshield wipers Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Installing the wiper blades

X Position newwiper blade:with recessB on lugA.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction of arrow= onto the wiper arm, until retaining clips; engage in bracket?.

X Make sure that wiper blade: is seated correctly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind- shield.

Windshield wipers 119

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The windshield wipers are jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers fail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The windshield washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits the center of the wind- shield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned. X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work- shop.

120 Windshield wipers Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Useful information ............................ 122 Overview of climate control sys- tems ................................................... 122 Operating the climate control sys- tems ................................................... 127 Setting the air vents ......................... 134

121

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

Overview of climate control systems

General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could other- wise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi- cation function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. The residual heat function can only be acti- vated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 133).

i When the weather is warm, ventilate the vehicle for a brief period. This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par- ticles of dust and soot and completely fil- ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol- lutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet.

122 Overview of climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

Air-conditioning system control panel

Canada only : Sets the temperature (Y page 129) ; Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 133) = Sets the air distribution (Y page 130) ? Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131) A Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127) B Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133) C Sets the airflow (Y page 130) D Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)

USA only : Sets the temperature (Y page 129) ; Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 131)

Overview of climate control systems 123

Cl im at e co nt ro l

= Sets the air distribution (Y page 130) ? Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131) A Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127) B Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133) C Sets the airflow (Y page 130) D Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)

Notes on using the air-conditioning system

Air-conditioning system Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use the air- conditioning system optimally. RSwitch on cooling with air dehumidification using the button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. RSet the temperature to 72 (22 ). R Recommendation for air distribution in winter: set theO and settings. Recommendation for air distribution in summer: set theP setting. ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func- tion briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the cli- mate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require full climate control capacity, the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated by pressing the ECO but- ton (Y page 145).

124 Overview of climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 129) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131) = Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 130) ? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 133) A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 129) C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133) D Sets the air distribution (Y page 130) E Increases the airflow (Y page 130) F Reduces the airflow (Y page 130) G Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 127) H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 129)

Overview of climate control systems 125

Cl im at e co nt ro l

USA only : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 129) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131) = Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 131) ? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127) A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 129) C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133) D Sets the air distribution (Y page 130) E Increases the airflow (Y page 130) F Reduces the airflow (Y page 130) G Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 127) H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 129)

Optimum use of 3-zone automatic cli- mate control

Automatic climate control The following contains instructions and rec- ommendations to enable you to get the most out of your automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the and buttons or the button on the control panel of the climate control. The indicator lamps in the and but- tons or the button light up. RSet the temperature to 72 (22 ).

ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func- tion briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem- perature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indi- cator lamp in the button goes out. RUse the residual heat function if youwant to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual

126 Overview of climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

heat function can only be activated or deac- tivated with the ignition switched off.

ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the cli- mate control only operates at a reduced capa- city. If you require full climate control capa- city, the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated by pressing the ECO button (Y page 145).

Operating the climate control sys- tems

Activating/deactivating climate con- trol

General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly

i Activate climate control primarily using the button (Y page 129).

Air-conditioning system X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X To switch on: turn airflow controlC clockwise to the desired position (except position 0) (Y page 123).

X To switch off: turn airflow controlC counter-clockwise to position 0 (Y page 123).

Dual-zone automatic climate control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X To switch on: press the button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode.

or X Press the^ button. The indicator lamp in the^ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored.

X To switch off: press the^ button. The indicator lamp in the^ button lights up.

Switching cooling with air dehumidi- fication on/off

General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- midification" function, the air inside the vehi- cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- cle will also not be dehumidified. The win- dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica- tion function only briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func- tion is only available when the engine is run- ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc- tion.

Operating the climate control systems 127

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Activating or deactivating X To activate: press the or but- ton. The indicator lamp in the or button lights up.

X To deactivate: press the or button. The indicator lamp in the or button goes out. The "Coolingwith air dehu- midification" function has a delayed switch- off feature.

128 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lamp in the or but- ton flashes three times or remains off. The "Cooling with air dehu- midification" function cannot be switched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notes Automatic mode is only available with dual- zone automatic air conditioning. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the tem- perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- midification" function, the air inside the vehi- cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- cle will also not be dehumidified. The win- dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica- tion function only briefly.

Automatic control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated.

X To switch to manual mode: press the _ button.

or X Press theI orK button. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.

Setting the temperature

Air-conditioning system X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X To increase or reduce: turn control: clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 123). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 (22 ). i If you turn control: counter-clockwise to the lowest temperature setting, air-recir- culation mode may activate automatically, depending on the outside temperature.

Dual-zone automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X To increase or decrease: turn control: orB clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 125).

Operating the climate control systems 129

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 (22 ). i If you turn controls: andB counter- clockwise to the lowest temperature set- ting, air-recirculation mode may activate automatically, depending on the outside temperature.

Setting the air distribution

Air-conditioning system X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X Press one or more of theP,O, buttons. The corresponding indicator lamp lights up briefly.

The following air distribution settings can be selected: Directs air through the defroster vents O Directs air through the footwell air

vents P Directs air through the center and side

air vents

i You can also activate several air distribu- tion settings simultaneously. To do this, press multiple air distribution buttons. The air is then directed through various vents.

Dual-zone automatic climate control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X Press the_ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display.

The following air distribution settings can be selected: P Directs air through the center and side

air vents O Directs air through the footwell air

vents S Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents

Directs air through the defroster vents b Directs the airflow through the

defroster, center and side air vents (Canada only)

a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents

_ Directs the airflow through the defroster vents, the center and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents (Canada only)

i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. You can only close the side air vents, by fully closing the adjuster on the side air vents (Y page 135).

Setting the airflow

Air-conditioning system X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X To increase or reduce: turn controlC clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 123).

Dual-zone automatic climate control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X To increase or reduce: press theK or I button.

Switching the ZONE function on/off This function is only available with dual-zone automatic climate control on vehicles for Canada. X To switch on: press the button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. The temperature setting for the driver's

130 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

side is not adopted for the front-passenger side.

X To switch off: press the button. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The temperature setting for the driv- er's side is adopted for the front-passenger side.

Defrosting the windshield

General notes You can use this function to defrost the wind- shield or to defrost the inside of the wind- shield and the side windows. Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func- tion as soon as the windshield is clear again.

Switching the "windshield defrosting" function on or off X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X To switch on: press the button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off

X To switch off: press the button. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.

or X Dual-zone automatic climate control: press the button. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode.

MAX COOL maximum cooling The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA. MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running. X To activate: press the button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To deactivate: press the button. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climate con- trol switches to the following functions: Rmaximum cooling Rmaximum airflow Rair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside X Activate the or cooling with air dehumidification function.

X Dual-zone automatic air conditioning: acti- vate the mode button.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the "Windshield defrosting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outside X Activate the windshield wipers. X Air-conditioning system: press theP or O button.

X Dual-zone automatic air conditioning: press the_ button until theP or O symbol appears in the display. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.

Operating the climate control systems 131

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Rear window defroster

General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off auto- matically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win- dow defroster may switch off.

Activating or deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X Press the button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up or goes out.

132 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lamp on the button flashes. The rear win- dow defroster has deactivated prema- turely or cannot be acti- vated.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con- sumers are switched on. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again.

The roof is open. X Close the roof. When the roof is closed, the rear window defroster can be acti- vated again.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

General notes If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particu- lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu- lation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up.

Activating or deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X To activate: press theg button. The indicator lamp in theg button lights up. i Air-recirculation mode is automatically activated at high levels of pollution (dual- zone automatic climate control only) or at high outside temperatures. When air-recir- culation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in theg button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press theg button. The indicator lamp in theg button goes out.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto- matically: Rafter approximately five minutes at out- side temperatures below approximately 41 (5 ) Rafter approximately five minutes if cool- ing with air dehumidification is deactiva- ted Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out- side temperatures above approximately 41 (5 ) if the "Cooling with air dehu- midification" function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notes The residual heat function is only available on vehicles for Canada. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the station- ary vehicle for up to 30 minutesafter the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature.

Operating the climate control systems 133

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Activating or deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- tion lock or remove it (Y page 139).

X To activate: press the or but- ton. The indicator lamp in the or button lights up. i The blower will run at a low speed regard- less of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed.

X To deactivate: press the or button. The indicator lamp in the or button goes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes Rwhen the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air out- lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in the engine compartment on the front- passenger side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior.

i You can move the adjusters for the air vents vertically or horizontally to set the direction of the airflow.

i For optimal climate control in the vehicle, open the air vents completely and set the adjusters to the central position.

Setting the center air vents

X To open the center air vents: turn the adjuster in one of center air vents: coun- ter-clockwise.

X To close the center air vents: turn the adjuster in one of center air vents: clock- wise until it engages.

134 Setting the air vents Cl im at e co nt ro l

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in the side air vent; to the left.

X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in the side air vent; to the right until it engages.

Setting the blower output of the AIR- SCARF vents

G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot.

You can adjust the blower output of AIR- SCARF vents: using the AIRSCARF button (Y page 100).

Setting the air vents 135

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Z

136

Useful information ............................ 138 Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- cle ....................................................... 138 Driving ............................................... 139 Automatic transmission ................... 148 Refueling ............................................ 158 Parking ............................................... 160 Driving tips ........................................ 163 Driving systems ................................ 168

137

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notes The sensor system of some driving and driv- ing safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in proce- dure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after sev- eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen- sate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi- cle and engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt- tle, during this period. RChange gear in good time, before the tach- ometer needle is of the way to the red area of the tachometer.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick- down). RIdeally, for the first 1,000miles (1,500 km), drive in program C.

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and bring the vehicle to full speed. Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes- AMG vehicles: RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. RChange gear in good time. You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the maximum permissible speed.

Self-locking rear axle differential (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil to improve protection of the rear axle differential: Rafter a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles (3,000 km) Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or 3 years

These oil changes prolong the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

138 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehi- cle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throt- tle until the engine has reached its operat- ing temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 (+20 ), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine oper- ation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey Shift the transmission to position P.

1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni- tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart- Key for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started.

Driving 139

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

KEYLESS-GO

General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS- GO start function and a detachable Start/ Stop button. The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approx- imately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi- ately. A checkwhich periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart- Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73).

Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can impair the functionality of the KEY- LESS-GO key.

If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again.

i The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch- off function.

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

: Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Further information on situations where an indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving (Y page 243). If Start/Stop button: has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button: once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. If you then open the driver's door when in this position, the power supply is deactiva- ted.

140 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/ Stop button: twice. The ignition is switched on. If you press Start/Stop button: once when in this position, the ignition is switched off again.

Removing the Start/Stop button

You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor- mal using the SmartKey. X RemoveStart/Stop button: from ignition lock;.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the Smart- Key is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system.

! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine.

Driving 141

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

i Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the exhaust flap of the exhaust system is checked after each cold start. A resulting noise can be heard during this process.

i During a cold start, the engine runs at higher speeds to enable the catalytic con- verter to reach its operating temperature. The sound of the enginemay change during this time.

Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P.

i You can start the engine in transmission position P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni- tion lock and release it as soon as the engine is running (Y page 139).

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKeymust be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop auto- matic engine start function. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 140). The engine starts.

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

! Change gear in good time and avoid spin- ning the wheels. You could otherwise dam- age the vehicle.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pull- ing away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 206). It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the shift lock released.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.

Information on the automatic release of the electric parking brake (Y page 161).

Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

142 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no lon- ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist.

Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position N. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop- ped under certain conditions. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

General notes

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles)

: ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you switch on the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button. If the engine has been switched off automat- ically by the ECO start/stop function, the ECO symbol is shown in the multifunc- tion display.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

: ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you switch on the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button. If the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automati- cally if the vehicle stops moving. If the ECO start/stop function has been man- ually deactivated (Y page 145) or a malfunc- tion has caused the system to be deactivated, the ECO symbol is not displayed. The ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C.

i If automatic cylinder shut-off is active in drive program C, then 4, the number of active cylinders, is also shown in the

Driving 143

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

ECO symbol. This means that the engine is operating with four cylinders. If cylinder shut-off is not active, the engine will operate with all eight cylinders. In this case, 8, the number of active cylinders, is shown in the ECO symbol.

Automatic engine switch-off

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles) If the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational when: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green. Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system. Rthe engine is at normal operating temper- ature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically.

i Automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then three subsequent stops)..

i The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automati- cally. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accel- erator pedal, the engine starts automati- cally and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles If the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational and the ECO symbol is displayed in green in the multifunction display, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green. Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system. Rthe engine is at normal operating temper- ature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened.

If the conditions for automatic engine switch- off are not all fulfilled, the ECO symbol is lit yellow.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically.

i The engine can be automatically switched off an unlimited number of times.

i The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automati- cally. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accel- erator pedal, the engine starts automati- cally and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated.

144 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Automatic engine start

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles) The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Rin transmission position D or N the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou move the transmission out of position P Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- ates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the wind- shield when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low

i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Rin transmission position D or N the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou move the transmission out of position P Ryou switch to drive program S or M Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this

Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- ates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the wind- shield when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low

i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again once the ECO symbol reap- pears in green in the multifunction display.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles)

X To switch off: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To switch on: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; lights up.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/ stop function has been deactivated man- ually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off auto- matically when the vehicle stops.

i The ECO start/stop function is activated each time the engine is switched on.

Driving 145

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

X To switch off: in drive program C, press ECO button:.

or X Switch to drive program S or M (Y page 152). Indicator lamp; and the ECO sym- bol in the multifunction display go out.

X To switch on: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; lights up. If drive pro- gram S orM is active, the automatic trans- mission switches to drive program C. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop func- tion is not available. Conditions for the automatic engine switch-off (Y page 144).

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/ stop function has been deactivated man- ually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off auto- matically when the vehicle stops.

i Each time the engine is started, the ECO start/stop function switches to the status (on or off) that was selected before switch- ing off the engine.

146 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine does not start.

The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 179) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 170).

X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 141). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 299). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.

X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not run- ning smoothly and is misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con- verter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving 147

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The coolant tempera- ture gauge shows a value above 248 (120 ). The coolant warning lamp may also be on and a warning tone may sound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 279). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fanmay be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X At coolant temperatures below 248 (120 ), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neu- tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi- cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

Selector lever

Gearshift overview (7G-TRONIC)

j Park position with selector lever lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive

Gearshift overview (9G-TRONIC)

! If the engine speed is too high or if the vehicle is rolling, do not shift the transmis- sion directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Do not open the driver's door while the vehicle is in motion. At low speeds in trans-

148 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

mission position D or R, park position P is otherwise engaged automatically. The transmission could be damaged.

j Park position k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive The selector lever always returns to its origi- nal position. The current transmission posi- tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display.

Transmission position and drive pro- gram display

: Transmission position display ; Drive program display The current position of the selector lever is shown by the indicators next to the selector lever. The indicators light up when the SmartKey is inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators go out when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock.

Engaging park position P (9G-TRONIC) X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.

X Press the P button in the center console.

i Park position P is disengaged if you: Rdepress the brake pedal and Rpush the selector lever forwards or back to the first point of resistance

The transmission shifts to neutral N. Park position P is engaged automatically and the electric parking brake applied: Rif you remove the SmartKey from the igni- tion lock Rif you switch off the engine using the Start/ Stop button and open the driver's or front- passenger door Rif you open the driver's door while traveling at low speed in transmission position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmis- sion position P if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 180) and on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 173).

Engaging reverse gear R (9G-TRONIC)

! Only shift the automatic transmission toR when the vehicle is stationary.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.

X Push the selector lever forwards past the first point of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further infor- mation on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 143).

Automatic transmission 149

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Engaging neutral N (9G-TRONIC) X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.

X Push the selector lever forwards or back to the first point of resistance.

Staying in neutral N (9G-TRONIC)

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

Using the SmartKey: RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. RShift to neutral N. RRelease the brake pedal. RIf the electric parking brake is engaged, release it. RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart- Key in the ignition lock.

With KEYLESS-GO: RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. REngage park position P.

RRelease the brake pedal. RRemove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. RSwitch on the ignition. RDepress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. RShift to neutral N. RRelease the brake pedal. RIf the electric parking brake is engaged, release it. RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart- Key in the ignition lock.

Engaging transmission position D (9G- TRONIC) X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.

X Push the selector lever back past the first point of resistance.

150 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Transmission positions

B Park position Only shift the transmission into position P when the vehicle is sta- tionary (Y page 148). The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addi- tion to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle. 7G-TRONIC: the key can only be removed if the transmission is in position P. If the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock, the selector lever is locked. 7G-TRONIC: in the event of a mal- function of the vehicle's electron- ics, the selector lever may lock in position P. Information on man- ually releasing the parking lock (Y page 157). 9G-TRONIC: if the key is removed from the ignition lock, the trans- mission is locked. 9G-TRONIC: the automatic trans- mission shifts into P automatically, Rwhen the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock Rwhen the engine is switched off with the transmission in position R or D and one of the doors is opened

9G-TRONIC: in the event of a mal- function of the vehicle's electron- ics, the transmission may lock in position P. Have the vehicle elec- tronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the auto- matic transmission could be dam- aged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission only to posi- tion N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutralN can damage the drive train.

7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the indi- vidual gears automatically when it is in trans- mission position D. This automatic gear shift- ing behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program (Y page 152) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal (Y page 151) Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the auto- matic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts

Automatic transmission 151

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Double-clutch function When shifting down, the double-clutch func- tion is active regardless of the currently selec- ted drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is condu- cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen- erated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected.

Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Program selector button

General notes

Example: program selector button

The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving character- istics. X Press program selector button: repeat- edly until the letter for the desired drive program appears in the multifunction dis- play.

On Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive program E is called drive program C.

E Economy C Controlled Efficiency

Comfortable, economical driving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program E (drive program C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles).

i Mercedes-AMG vehicles: when in drive program C and under low load, the engine operates on just four cylinders. This is the case in city traffic or on a country road, for example. This reduces fuel consumption. Cylinder shut-off is inactive in drive pro- grams S and M, so that the engine will operate with all eight cylinders.

i Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 155). As well as this permanent drive programM, you can also activate temporary drive pro- gram M (Y page 153).

i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 153).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter ; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter In the manual drive program, you can change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters

152 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

or the selector lever (7G-TRONIC) (Y page 153). Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 155). Further information about temporary drive program M (Y page 153).

i The full range of functions for the steering wheel paddle shifters is available only once operating temperature has been reached.

i You can only change gear with the steer- ing wheel paddle shifters when the trans- mission is in position D.

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive programs E and S Drive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmission settings. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle having improved driving stabil- ity, for example on slippery road surfaces. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin.

Drive program S is characterized by the fol- lowing: Rsporty engine and transmission settings. Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points.

Manual drive program M

General notes In this drive program, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel pad- dle shifters or the selector lever (7G-TRONIC). The transmission must be in position D. You can activate manual drive program M in the E and S automatic drive programs.

i As well as temporary drive program M, you can also activate permanent drive pro- gram M (Y page 152). Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 155).

Activating X Shift the transmission to position D. X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 152). Manual drive programM is temporarily acti- vated. The selected gear and M appear in the multifunction display.

Changing gear (7G-TRONIC) X To shift up: press the selector lever to the right towards D+.

or X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 152). In cases where it is permissible, the auto- matic transmission shifts up to the next gear. i If the maximum engine speed on the cur- rently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage.

X To shift down: press the selector lever to the left towards D.

or X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 152). In cases where it is permissible, the auto- matic transmission shifts down to the next gear.

Automatic transmission 153

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

i For maximum acceleration, push the selector lever to the left or pull and hold the left-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter until the transmission shifts to the optimal gear for the current speed.

i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speedwhen shifting down, the auto- matic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down.

i Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting.

Changing gear (9G-TRONIC) If you pull on the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter, the automatic transmission switches to manual drive program M for a limited amount of time. Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic trans- mission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted. X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 152). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. i If the maximum engine speed on the cur- rently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer- ing wheel paddle shifter (Y page 152). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speedwhen shifting down, the auto- matic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down.

i Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The rec- ommended gear is shown in themultifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear; according to gearshift recommendation: when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Disarming If you have activated manual drive program M, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. If manual drive program M has been deacti- vated, the automatic transmission shifts into the automatic drive program that was last selected, i.e. E or S. You can also deactivate manual drive pro- gram M yourself: X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad- dle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 152).

or X Use the lever to switch the transmission position.

or X Use the program selector button to change the drive program (Y page 152). Manual drive program M is deactivated. The automatic transmission switches into the automatic drive program that was last selected, i.e. E or S.

154 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Manual drive program

General information In this drive program, you can permanently change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters or the selector lever (7G-TRONIC). The transmission must be in position D.

i As well as this permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (Y page 153).

Switching on the manual drive program Manual drive program M is different from drive program S with regard to spontaneity, responsiveness and smoothness of gear changes. Manual drive program M can be selected using the program selector button. You can change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters or the selector lever in manual drive programM if the transmission is in positionD. The selected gear appears in the multifunc- tion display. X Press the program selector button (Y page 152) repeatedly untilM appears in the multifunction display.

Changing gear (7G-TRONIC) X To shift up: press the selector lever to the right towards D+.

or X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 152). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear.

X To shift down: press the selector lever to the left towards D.

or X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 152). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear.

i If you brake the vehicle or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission will shift down to a gear that will allow the vehicle to accelerate or pull away again.

i For maximum acceleration, push the selector lever to the left or pull and hold the left-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter until the transmission shifts to the optimal gear for the current speed.

Changing gear (9G-TRONIC) X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 152). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer- ing wheel paddle shifter (Y page 152). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear.

X Maximum acceleration: pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the transmission selects the optimum gear for the current speed. i If you brake the vehicle or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission will shift down to a gear that will allow the vehicle to accelerate or pull away again.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The rec- ommended gear is shown in themultifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear; according to gearshift recommendation: when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Automatic transmission 155

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

! Inmanual drive programM, the automatic transmission does not shift up automati- cally even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.

: Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul- tifunction display. X When the UPmessage is shown in the mul- tifunction display, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.

Kickdown You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M.

Switching off themanual drive program X Press the program selector button (Y page 152).

156 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The transmission has problems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work- shop immediately.

The acceleration ability is deteriorating. The transmission no longer changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode. 7G-TRONIC: it is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. 9G-TRONIC: it is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is in position N. X Stop the vehicle. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. 7G-TRONIC: If D is selected, the transmission shifts into sec- ond gear, if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work- shop immediately.

Deactivating the parking lock man- ually (7G-TRONIC) ! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to remove the selector lever gaiter from the center console. This could damage the selector lever gaiter.

X Apply the electric parking brake. X Press the frame of selector level gaiter: together somewhat on the side edge at the back and hold with one hand;.

X With the other hand, pry off the frame of selector level gaiter: with a flat, blunt object (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in cloth) at rear edge=, pulling it up and out at the same time.

X Press release button? down and simul- taneously move the selector lever out of position P. The selector lever can now bemoved freely until it is returned to position P.

In the event of an electrical malfunction, it is possible to release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P. This is the case, for example, if you wish to tow the vehicle away.

Automatic transmission 157

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- sion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance with- out delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ing. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni- tion if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali- fied specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 347).

Refueling

General information The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto- matically when you unlock or lock the vehicle with the key or using KEYLESS-GO. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

158 Refueling Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Opening the fuel filler flap

: Fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tire pressure table ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refu-

eled X Switch the engine off. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow:. The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flap X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close fuel filler flap:.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle.

i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. The; Check Engine warning lampmay also light up. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 230). For further information onwarning and indi- cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 249).

Refueling 159

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from the vehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNING Risk of explosion or fire. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 immediately and remove it (Y page 139).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can- not be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 72).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 74).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam- med. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigsmay ignite if they come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- cle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged.

160 Parking Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmission must be in position P and the transmission position display must show P in the multifunction display. Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi- ents.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neu- tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi- cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmission X Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. 7G-TRONIC: the key can only be removed if the transmission is in position P.

X With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS- GO Start/Stop button (Y page 140). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this cor- responds to key position 1. When the driv- er's door is open, this corresponds to SmartKey position0: "SmartKey removed".

If you try to switch off the engine when the transmission is not in position P, a message appears in the multifunction display. A signal sounds.

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on- board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it roll- ing away.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- tion P.

It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

i The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal.

Parking 161

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Applying or releasing manually

X To engage: push handle:. When the electric parking brake is engaged, theF (USA only) or! (Canada only) red indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. i The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: switch on the ignition. X Pull handle:. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- ter goes out. i The electric parking brake can only be released: Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 139) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button

Applying automatically (7G-TRONIC) The electric parking brake is applied auto- matically if: RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary

In addition, at least one of the following con- ditions must be fulfilled:

Rthe engine is switched off. Rthe driver's seat belt is not inserted in the belt buckle and the driver's door is open. Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automati- cally engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Applying automatically (9G-TRONIC) The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position P and: Rthe engine is switched off or Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened.

To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle:. The electric parking brake is also engaged automatically if: RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary

In addition, at least one of the following con- ditions must be fulfilled: Rthere is a system malfunction. Rthe power supply is insufficient. Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automati- cally engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

162 Parking Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Releasing automatically The electric parking brake is released auto- matically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe engine is running. Rthe transmission is in position D or R. Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Rthe driver's door is closed. Ryou have shifted out of P or you have pre- viously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the acceler- ator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move.

Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle:of the electric parking brake. i The vehicle is braked for as long as the handle of the electric parking brake is pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle is depressed, the greater the braking force.

During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Please Release Parking Brake message appears Rthe redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- ter flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehiclemay suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.

i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist work- shop.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equip- ment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the coun- try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic- tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-freemode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are

Driving tips 163

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.

Drive sensibly save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: RThe tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. RRemove unnecessary loads. RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. RObserve the service intervals in the Main- tenance Booklet or in the service interval display. Have all themaintenancework car- ried in accordance with Daimler AG regu- lations.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv- ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg- ment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- dent is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak- ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave

the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. All work on the engine must be carried out only by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

The ECO display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selec- ted settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption. The ECO display consists of three bars: RAccel. RConstant RCoasting The percent value is the average value of the three bars. The three bars and themean value begin at the value of 50 %. A higher percent- age indicates a more economical driving style.

164 Driving tips Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption. Apart from driving style, consumption is dependent on many factors such as, e.g.: Rload Rtire pressure Rcold start Rchoice of route Relectrical consumers switched on These factors are not included in the ECO dis- play. The evaluation of your driving style is carried out using the following three categories: RAccel. (evaluation of all acceleration pro- cesses): - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty acceleration RConstant (assessment of driving behavior at all times): - The bar fills up: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration processes): - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds. To achieve a higher value in the categories Acceleration and Constant: Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Rdrive in drive program E.

i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the bar for Constant will change.

i The ECO display summarizes the driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion. For this reason, the bars change dynamically at the beginning of the journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. Formore dynamic changes, carry out a manual reset.

For more information on the ECO display, see (Y page 198).

Brakes

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine brak- ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long, steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes. To use engine braking, shift to a lower gear in good time. This helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and wearing them out exces- sively. When making use of the engine braking effect, it is possible that a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. in the case of suddenly changing or slippery road surface conditions. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not cov- ered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is espe- cially important if the vehicle is laden. This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS.

Driving tips 165

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Heavy and light loads

G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the air- flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, theremay be a delayed reac- tion from the brakeswhen braking for the first time. Thismay also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. You then have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehi- cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten- tion to the traffic conditions. This will warmup the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corro- sion.

Limited braking performance on salt- treated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance.

RBrake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead.

Servicing the brakes

! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is running

Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immedi- ately. Consult a qualified specialist work- shop to arrange this.

! As the ESP system operates automati- cally, the engine and the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if the electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamom- eter (maximum 10 seconds). Braking triggered automatically by ESP may seriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the function- ality of your brakes at regular intervals. Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 62). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake

166 Driving tips Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehi- cle's operating safety. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.

High-performance and ceramic brake system (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) The high-performance brake system is only available on Mercedes-AMG vehicles. The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: RSpeed RBraking force RAmbient conditions, e.g. temperature and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driv- ing style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circum- stances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain more informa- tion on this from a qualified specialist work- shop. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after sev- eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen- sate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period. Excessive heavy braking results in corre- spondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages

in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds. Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rlower your speed. Ravoid ruts. Ravoid sudden steering movements. Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of anywater before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic compo- nents in the engine or the automatic trans- mission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine brak- ing on a slippery road surface.

Driving tips 167

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali- fied specialist workshop at the onset of win- ter. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position N. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are dis- played after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freez- ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road con- ditions when temperatures are around freez- ing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 311). For more information on driving with summer tires, see (Y page 310).

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 310).

Driving systems

Cruise Control

General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select a lower gear in good time. By doing so, youwill make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic con- ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an acci- dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis- tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- erating could cause the drivewheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

168 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Cruise control lever

Cruise control lever : To store the current speed or a higher

speed ; To store the current speed or call up the

last stored speed = To store the current speed or a lower

speed ? To deactivate cruise control When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the status indicator of the multifunction display: RUSA only: e.g. CRUISE 55 Miles RCanada only: e.g. 90 Km/h Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed

Storing and maintaining a speed X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: or down?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed.

You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumedwhen the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the

stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes.

i Vehicles with manual transmission: RAlways drive at adequate, but not exces- sive, engine speeds. RChange gear in good time. RIf possible, do not shift down several gears at a time.

Storing or calling up a speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- ates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- tions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever toward you=.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed.

Setting a speed

G WARNING Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments. Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly

Driving systems 169

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

press the cruise control lever up: to the pressure point for a higher speed or down? for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up: past the pressure point for a higher speed or down? for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For exam- ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have fin- ished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

Cruise control lever

There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- wards: .

or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)

RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you shift to a gear that is too high, and as a result the engine speed is too low Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con trol Off message in the multifunction dis- play for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the dis- tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi- cles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically to avoid exceeding the set speed or to maintain the designated distance from the vehicle in front. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is espe- cially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre- vent a collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients.

170 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Important safety notes

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles Roncoming and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden- tify other road users and complex traffic sit- uations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- cally in certain situations.

To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti- vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func- tion in the following or other similar situa- tions: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- erating could cause the drivewheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi- cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect- edly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.

Driving systems 171

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

This speed may: Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the left- hand lane Rbe so highwhen driving in the left-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand lane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

Cruise control lever : To store the current speed or a higher

speed ; To set the specified minimum distance = To store the current speed or call up the

last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower

speed A To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS; storing, maintaining and calling up a speed

Important safety notes ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- cally in certain situations.

To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti- vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func- tion in the following or other similar situa- tions: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol- lowing conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Ryour vehicle must not be secured by the electric parking brake. RESP must be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe hood must be closed. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Activating X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you=, up: or down? . DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up: to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down? for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

or X To adjust the speed in 5 mph incre- ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up: past

172 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

the pressure point for a higher speed, or down? for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed.

i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passivemes- sage appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not bemaintained. Youwill be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h.

Pulling away and driving The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehi- cle then brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all times. If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you=.

or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehi- cle accelerates to the set speed.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.

In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. The vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive program DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S orM driv- ing program (Y page 152). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E (AMG vehicles: C) drive pro- gram, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and- start traffic.

Changing lanes If you wish to move into the overtaking lane (for left-hand-drive vehicles, the passing lane is the left-hand lane), DISTRONIC PLUS assists you if: Ryou are driving faster than 70 km/h RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis- tance to a vehicle in front Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis- tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small.

Stopping G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi- cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.

Driving systems 173

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Rthe electrical system in the engine com- partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 176). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC: The electric parking brake automatically secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe hood is opened. Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If there is a malfunction in the vehicle elec- tronics, a warning message may also appear in the multifunction display. Brake Immediately X Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message in the multifunction

display goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is deac- tivated.

Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC: Shift to 'P' X Shift the transmission to position P to pre- vent the vehicle from rolling away. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The warn- ing message in the multifunction display disappears.

The horn will also sound at regular intervals if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you: Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's door and remove your seat belt. Ropen the hood The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact that the vehicle has been parked while DISTRONIC PLUS is still activated. The sound becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

i If the engine has been switched off, it cannot be started again until DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated.

Vehicles with 9GTRONIC: When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to posi- tion P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction in the electric parking brake occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically.

174 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- ates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- tions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you=.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value.

Setting a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up: to the pressure point for a higher speed or down? for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up: past the pressure point for a higher speed or down? for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds.With this func- tion, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 176). Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if neces- sary.

Cruise control lever X To increase: turn control= toward;. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control= toward:. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

Driving systems 175

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru- ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments; in the set speed range light up. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments; between speed of the vehicle in front: and stored speed= light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti- vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle

X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 203).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa- ted

: Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable = Own vehicle ? DISTRONIC PLUS activated X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 203).

You will initially see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

Cruise control lever

176 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- wards:.

or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Offmessage in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel- erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished over- taking.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva- ted if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front- passenger door is open Rthe vehicle has skidded If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multi- function display for approximately five sec- onds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi- cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Driving systems 177

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi- cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta- cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat- ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

Dynamic handling package

General notes

The adjustable damping system adapts to the current driving conditions. The adjustment depends on whether you have selected Sport or Comfort mode. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuning The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in sports mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode if you want more direct contact with the road when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on wind- ing country roads.

178 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X If indicator lamp: is not lit: press but- ton;. Indicator lamp: lights up. You have selec- ted the suspension for a sporty driving style.

Comfort tuning Select comfort mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. X If indicator lamp: is lit: press but- ton;. Indicator lamp: goes out. You have selec- ted the suspension for a comfortable driv- ing style.

HOLD function

General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

Rthe electrical system in the engine com- partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- cally in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti- vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func- tion in the following or other similar situa- tions: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 180) .

Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened Rthe hood is closed. Rthe electric parking brake is released Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

Driving systems 179

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

X Make sure that the activation conditions are met.

X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until: HOLD appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function

General notes The HOLD function is deactivated automati- cally if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P. Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain amount of pressure until HOLD disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake.

Vehicles with manual transmission or 7G- TRONIC The electric parking brake automatically secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is activated and: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe hood is opened. Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

If there is a malfunction in the vehicle elec- tronics, a warning message may also appear in the multifunction display. Brake Immediately X Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. The HOLD function is deactivated.

Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC only: Shift to 'P' X Shift the transmission to position P to pre- vent the vehicle from rolling away. The HOLD function is deactivated. The warning message in the multifunction dis- play disappears.

The horn will also sound at regular intervals if the HOLD function is activated and you: Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's door and remove your seat belt. Ropen the hood The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact that the vehicle has been parked while the HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD func- tion is deactivated.

i If the engine has been switched off, it cannot be started again until the HOLD function has been deactivated.

Vehicles with 9GTRONIC: When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to posi- tion P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activa- ted when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

180 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

If a malfunction in the electric parking brake occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace- ment for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park- ing space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensorsmay not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONICmay not function correctly on uneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rmove the selector lever to position D, R or N on vehicles with automatic transmission Rrelease the electric parking brake. PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.

Range of the sensors

General notes PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con- sideration that are: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- mals or objects. Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang- ing loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example)

Side view

Driving systems 181

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Top view

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function cor- rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 285).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warn- ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. The warning display for the rear area is loca- ted between the roll bars. The warning display for each side of the vehi- cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg- ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness= light up. The selector lever position or selected auto- matic transmission position and the direction inwhich the vehicle is rolling determinewhich warning display is active when the engine is running. Manual transmission:

Gear lever posi- tion

Warning display

Forwards gear or Neutral

Front area activated

Reverse gear or the vehicle is rolling backwards

Rear and front areas activated

182 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Automatic transmission:

Transmission position

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle is rolling back- wards

Rear and front areas activated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approx- imately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two sec- onds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp ; Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp: is on then PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Guidance is also deacti- vated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock.

Driving systems 183

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deacti- vated after approx- imately 20 seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. PARKTRONIC is deacti- vated after approx- imately five seconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 285). X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Parking Guidance

Important safety notes Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to meas- ure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. You receive steering instruc- tions when parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 181). Parking Guidance is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your imme- diate surroundings. You are always responsi- ble for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

G WARNING If objects are located above the detection range, ParkingGuidancemay provide steering instructions too soon. You may cause a colli- sion as a result. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop and switch off Parking Assist.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires.

When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Guidance is also unavailable. Parking Guidance may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.: Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces

184 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e. not on the pavement, for example. Parking Guidance may not detect flat curbs

Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- ing space as possible. RParking spaces that are littered or over- grown might be identified or measured incorrectly. RParking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 182) warning messages during the parking procedure. RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, youmust not use Parking Guidance. RNever use Parking Guidance with snow chains or an emergency spare wheel moun- ted. RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct effect on the steering instructions. RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the posi- tion and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. In some cases, Parking Guidance may guide you too far or not far enough into a parking space. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If neces- sary, cancel the parking procedure with Parking Guidance.

Detecting parking spaces

: Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Parking Guidance is automatically activated when you drive forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right= or the left: also appears. Parking Guidance only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. To park on the driver's side, you must leave the driver's side turn signal switched on until you have engaged reverse gear. Parking Guidance will only detect parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel Rthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wide Rthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than your vehicle

A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approx- imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Driving systems 185

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Parking

Moving the vehicle into the stop position X Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster.

X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to reverse gear. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift into position R. The multifunction display shows the Check Vehicle Surroundings Press 'OK' to Confirm message.

X Press thea button on the multifunction steering wheel to confirm. The multifunction display switches to Park- ing Guidance. Depending on your distance from the park- ing space, the Please Drive Backward message will appear in the multifunction display.

X If necessary, reverse towards the parking space. This is indicated by an arrow point- ing backwards. Continue backing up until you hear a tone. Stop the stop position has been reached. The arrow is white. The Please Steer Wheel to the Right or Please Steer Wheel to the Left message appears in the multifunction dis- play.

Backing up into the parking space

X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the specified direction until the arrow is white and a warning tone sounds.

X To reverse into the parking space:main- tain the steering wheel angle and reverse carefully.

X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, The vehicle has reached the position in which you need to countersteer. The Please Steer Wheel to the Right or Please Steer Wheel to the Left message appears in the multifunction dis- play.

X To countersteer: while the vehicle is sta- tionary, turn the steering wheel in the specified direction until the arrow is white and a warning tone sounds.

X To reverse into the parking space:main- tain the steering wheel angle and reverse carefully.

X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone. The Parking Guidance Finished mes- sage appears in the multifunction display and a tone sounds. You may be asked to steer in a different direction and then change gear. In this case, further displays in the multifunction display will direct you to the final position.

186 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X Maneuver if necessary. X Always observe the warning messages dis- played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 182).

Canceling Parking Guidance X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen- ter console (Y page 183). Parking Guidance is canceled immediately and PARKTRONIC is deactivated.

Parking Guidance is canceled automatically if it is no longer possible to guide you into the parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. The parking space symbol goes out and a warning tone sounds. The Parking Guid ance Canceledmessage appears in themul- tifunction display.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica- tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con- centration on the part of the driver, it sug- gests you take a break. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length of journey

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur- face is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind

Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than 112 mph (180 km/h) Rif you are currently using COMAND or mak- ing a telephone call with it Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.

Warning and display messages in the multifunction display X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- board computer (Y page 203). If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone twice and the Attention Assist: Take a Break! message appears in the multifunction dis- play.

X If necessary, take a break. X Press thea or% button to confirm the message.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentra- tion, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con- tinue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if: Ryou switch off the engine. Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break.

Driving systems 187

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphics display.

Driving Assistance package

General notes The Driving Assistance package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 188) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 189).

Blind Spot Assist

General notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the moni- tored area. If you then switch on the corre- sponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring purposes. For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radar sensor system must be operational.

Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions care- fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive

radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensors

Blind Spot Assistmonitors the area up to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in themiddle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such as trucks.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear

188 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensors must not be covered, for exam- ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol- lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam- age to the bumpers, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly.

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yel- low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica- tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre- sponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light.

Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in themonitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activa- ted in the on-board computer (Y page 203).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock. Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle with camera:, which is mounted at the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you select km on the on-board computer in the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func- tion (Y page 204), Lane Keeping Assist is active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lanemarking. It will warn you by

Driving systems 189

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

means of intermittent vibration in the steer- ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings. In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane. The systemmay be impaired or may not func- tion if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- cient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera

Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark- ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con- struction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lanemarkings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (Y page 204). If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (Y page 203) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.

Standard If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP.

Adaptive When Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra- tion occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard.

190 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when nec- essary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain con- ditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high- way. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving systems 191

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

192

Useful information ............................ 194 Important safety notes ..................... 194 Displays and operation ..................... 194 Menus and submenus ...................... 197 Display messages ............................. 211 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 241

193

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra nd

di sp la ys

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- functioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- ately.

The on-board computer only showsmessages or warnings from certain systems in the mul- tifunction display. You should therefore make

sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 31).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lighting The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle inte- rior can be adjusted using the brightness con- trol knob. The brightness control knob is located on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (Y page 31). X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise. If you turn the light switch to, T or L, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated.

Speedometer with segments The speedometer is divided into segments only on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 170): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front that is driving at a slower speed than the stored speed:

194 Displays and operation On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra nd

di sp la ys

The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road con- ditions when temperatures are around freez- ing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature display is in themul- tifunction display (Y page 196). A change in the outside temperature is shown in the multifunction display after a delay.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high. If the coolant temperature is over 248 (120 ), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 31). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant tem- perature may rise to 248 (120 ).

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display ; Switches on the Voice Control System

(see the separate operating instructions) = Right control panel ? Left control panel A Back button X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Displays and operation 195

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly: RScrolls in lists RSelects a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number

9

:

Press and hold: RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open

a RConfirms the selection or display message RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a call RExits the telephone book/redial memory

6 RMakes or accepts a call RSwitches to the redial memory

W X

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly: RBack RSwitches off the Voice Control System (see the separate oper- ating instructions) RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory

% Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu

Multifunction display

: Transmission position (Y page 149) ; Drive program (Y page 149) = Text field ? Menu bar

196 Displays and operation On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

A Time B Outside temperature or speed

(Y page 205) X To display menu bar?: press the= or; button on the steering wheel. If you do not press the buttons any longer, menu bar? is faded out after a few sec- onds. Text field= shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages.

i You can set the time using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Possible displays in themultifunction display: Z Gearshift recommendation when

shifting manually (Y page 153) XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 184) CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 168) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 112) ECO start/stop function

(Y page 143) HOLD function (Y page 179)

Menus and submenus

Menu overview Using the= or; button on the steer- ing wheel, open the menu bar. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 195). Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select the following menu: RTrip menu (Y page 197) RNavi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 199) RAudio menu (Y page 200) RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 201) RDriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 202) RServ menu (Y page 204)

RSett menu (settings) (Y page 204) RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 208)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer: and odometer; appears.

Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset"

: Distance ; Driving time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select From Start or From Reset.

The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 199). In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From Start:

Menus and submenus 197

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. When 9,999 hours or 99,999miles have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From Reset. ECO display

The ECO display is not available in Mercedes- AMG vehicles. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select ECO DISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- matically reset. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 164).

Displaying the range and current fuel consumption

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis- plays approximate range:.

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press9 or: to select the display with approximate range: and current fuel consumption;. Approximate range: that can be covered is calculated according to your current driv- ing style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueledC appears instead of approximate range:. Recuperation display= shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display= depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles.

Digital speedometer

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select digital speedometer;. Gearshift recommendation: Z can also appear in the display. Observe the information on gearshift rec- ommendation: when shifting manually (Y page 153). Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift rec- ommendation is shown in the status bar of themultifunction display and not in the dig- ital speedometer display.

198 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Resetting values

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select the function that you wish to reset.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press: to select Yes and pressa to confirm.

You can reset the values of the following func- tions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display

i If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "FromStart" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. Further infor- mation on navigation (see the separate oper- ating instructions). X Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel ; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination ; Distance to the next change of direction = Current road ? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation

: Road into which the change of direction leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

= Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is announced, you will see symbol= for the change of direction and distance graphic;. The distance indi- cator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced

Menus and submenus 199

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation

: Road into which the change of direction leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

= Lanes not recommended ? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction A Change-of-direction symbol On multilane roads, new lane recommenda- tions can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended=: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane.

Other status indicators of the naviga- tion system The navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status. RO: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. RNew Route... or Calculating Route: calculating a new route ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map

but the road is not recognize, e.g. new roads, car parks or private land RNo Route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Frequency range ; Station frequency with memory position The multifunction display shows station; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed along with station; if this has been stored. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND and select Radio; see the separate operat- ing instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the9 or: button.

If no station list is received: X To select a station using the station search: press and briefly hold the9 or: button.

i For information on changing frequency range and storing stations, see the sepa- rate operating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. You can find further information on radio operation in the separate operating instruc- tions.

200 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Operating an audio player or audio media

Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equip- ment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on COMAND and select audio CD or MP3 mode, see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desired track: appears. If you press and hold the9 or: button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data car- riers support this function.

If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected).

Video DVD operation

X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD (see the separate operating instructions).

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desired scene: appears.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the man- ufacturers operating instructions).

X Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth connection to COMAND, see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Tel menu.

You will see one of the following display mes- sages in the multifunction display: RPhone READY or the name of the mobile phone network provider:

Menus and submenus 201

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

The mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service: No network is available or themobile phone is searching for a network.

Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the mul- tifunction display. You can accept a call at any time, even if you are not in the Tel menu. X Press the6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a call You can end or reject a call anytime, even if you are not in the Tel menu. X Press the~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone book X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button to switch to the phone book.

X Authorize access to the phone book on the phone.

X Press: or9 to select the names one after the other.

or X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold the: or9 button for longer than one second. The names in the phone book are displayed quickly one after the other.

Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the6 ora button to start dialing.

or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the6 ora button to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select the number you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial- ing.

or X To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or% button.

Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to the redial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select the desired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial- ing.

or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or% button.

Assistance menu

Introduction Depending on your vehicle's equipment, in the Assist. menu, you have the following options: RDisplaying the assistance graphic (Y page 203) RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 203)

202 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 203) RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist (Y page 203) RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 204)

Displaying the assistance graphic

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select Assistance Graphic.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic. The assistance graphic shows you the sta- tus of and/or information from other driv- ing systems or driving safety systems: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 176) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 62) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 187) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 189)

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS X Press the=or;button on the steer- ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to select Collision Prevent. Assist.

X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea button again. When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display.

For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 62).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST X Press the=or;button on the steer- ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to select Attention Assist.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea button again. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunc- tion display in the assistance graphics dis- play.

For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 187).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist X Press the=or;button on the steer- ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to select Blind Spot Assist.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea button again.

For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 188)

Menus and submenus 203

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist X Press the=or;button on the steer- ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to select Lane Keeping Assist.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. The current selection appears.

X Pressa again. X Press: or9 to set Off, Standard or Adaptive.

X Press thea button to save the setting. When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane mark- ings as bright lines in the assistance graphic.

For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 189).

Service menu

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Serv. menu: RCalling up display messages (Y page 211) RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 315) RChecking the tire pressure electronically (Y page 316) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 281)

Settings menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, in the Sett. menu you have the fol- lowing options: RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 204) RChanging the light settings (Y page 205) RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 206) RChanging the convenience settings (Y page 206) RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 207)

Instrument cluster

Selecting the distance unit The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether cer- tain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func- tion. The current setting km or miles appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for dis- tance applies to: Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu Rthe odometer and trip odometer

204 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Rthe trip computer Rthe current consumption and the range Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting permanent display The Permanent Display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction dis- play always shows the outside temperature or the speed in km/h. Canada only: the speed is shown in mph. The speed display is inverse to the speedometer. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Permanent Display: function. The current setting Outside Temperature or Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer [mph] appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Lights

Setting the daytime running lamps This function is not available in Canada. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Light submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select the Daytime Running Lights function. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the multifunction display shows the cone of light and the W symbol in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Further information on daytime running lamps (Y page 108).

Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Light submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Amb. Light +/- function. The current setting appears.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to adjust the brightness to a level from Disabled to Level 5 (bright).

X Press thea or% button to save the setting.

Activating/deactivating surround light- ing and exterior lighting delayed switch- off X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Light submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select the Sur round Lighting function. If the Surround Lighting function is acti- vated, the multifunction display shows the light cone and the area around the vehicle in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte- rior lighting temporarily: X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart- Key to position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated.

Menus and submenus 205

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine. If you have activated the Surround Light ing function and you turn the light switch to , the following functions are activated when it is dark: Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, the surround lighting is switched off and automatic headlamp mode is activated (Y page 108). Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior lighting goes off after 15 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol- lowing light up: RParking lamps RLow-beam headlamps RDaytime running lamps RSide marker lamps RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interior light- ing delayed switch-off If you activate the Interior Lighting Delay function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Light submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Interior Lighting Delay function. If the Interior Lighting Delay function is activated, the multifunction display shows the vehicle interior in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism If you activate the Automatic Door Lock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Vehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Automatic Door Lock function. When the Automatic door locks func- tion is activated, the multifunction display shows the left-hand vehicle door in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting. For further information on the automatic lock- ing feature, see (Y page 79).

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Vehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the multifunction display shows the& symbol in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY- ENTRY/EXIT feature G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle

206 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

occupants particularly children could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- ing adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust- ment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Convenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Easy Entry/Exit function. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activa- ted, the multifunction display shows the steering wheel in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting. Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 101).

Switching the belt adjustment on/off X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Convenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Belt Adjustment function. If the Belt Adjustment function is activa- ted, the multifunction display shows the seat belt in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting. For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 45).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock- ing feature on/off This function is only available when the vehi- cle is equippedwith the electrical fold-in func- tion. This function is only available in Canada. When you activate the Auto. Mirror Fold ing function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror Folding function and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button on the door (Y page 104), they will not fold out automat- ically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Convenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Auto. Mirror Folding function. If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the exterior mirror in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Restoring the factory settings X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the Factory Setting submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. The Reset All Settings? function appears.

Menus and submenus 207

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Press the: or9 button to select No or Yes.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec- tion. If you have selected Yes and confirmed, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Light submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

WARMUP

: Digital speedometer ; Gear indicator = Upshift indicator ? Engine oil temperature A Coolant temperature B Transmission fluid temperature X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the AMG menu.

Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP= indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program. Engine and transmission oil temperature: when the engine and transmission are at nor- mal operating temperature, oil tempera- ture? andB are displayed in white in the multifunction display. If the multifunction display shows oil temper- ature? orB in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out- put during this time.

SETUP

: Drive program C, S or M ; ESP mode ON, OFF or SPORT SPORT han-

dling mode

SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the SPORT handling mode. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads.

: Lap ; RACETIMER You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi- tion 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER appears.

X To start: press thea button to start the RACETIMER.

208 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to select Interm. Time.

X Pressa to confirm. The intermediate time appears for five sec- onds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap X Pressa to confirm New Lap. i It is possible to store a maximum of six- teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com- pleted with Finish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steering wheel.

X Pressa to confirm Yes. The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to

position 3 and then pressa to confirm Start, timing is continued. Resetting the current lap X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the= or; button to select Reset Lap.

X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Pressa to confirm Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi- function display.

X Press the: button to select Yes and press thea button to confirm. All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation ; Total time driven = Average speed ? Distance covered A Maximum speed

Menus and submenus 209

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

If you save at least one lap and then stop RACETIMER, an overall evaluation is availa- ble. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation appears.

Lap statistics

: Lap ; Lap time = Average lap speed ? Lap length A Top speed during lap The lap evaluation function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press9 repeatedly until the lap evalu- ation appears. Each lap appears in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym- bol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select a different lap evaluation.

210 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages

Introduction

General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordancewith the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 179) RParking (Y page 160)

Hiding display messages X Press thea or% button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message.

High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-pri- ority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes- sages have been remedied.

Message memory The on-board computer saves certain displaymessages in themessagememory. You can call up the display messages: X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages. X Pressa to confirm. X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high- priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.

Display messages 211

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! Currently Unavail able See Opera tor's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRESAFE, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the , and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes are: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete. Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec- ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move- ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

ABS, ESP, BAS, PRESAFE, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), , and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.

212 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec- ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Currently Unavail able See Opera tor's Manual

ESP, BAS, PRESAFE, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the and warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move- ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 213

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Inoperative See Operator's Manual

ESP, BAS, PRESAFE, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the and warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP, BAS, PRE- SAFE, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the , and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec- ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

214 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Turn On the Igni tion to Release the Parking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni- tion was switched off. X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 161). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (Y page 161).

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: X Switch the ignition off. X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. or X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 161).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 215

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: X Do not drive on. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 331). X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten sec- onds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 161).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

216 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the redF (USAonly) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the selector lever to P, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake Inop erative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten sec- onds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over- voltage or undervoltage. X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 217

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

# Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc- tioning. X Have the mbrace system checked at a qualified specialist work- shop.

PRE-SAFE Inopera tive See Opera tor's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

218 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Collision Preven tion Assist Plus Currently Unavail able See Opera tor's Manual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not opera- tional. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta- tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Restart the engine.

Collision Preven tion Assist Plus Inoperative

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due to a malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 219

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Radar Sensors Dirty See Opera tor's Manual

At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys- tems is temporarily restricted or inoperative: RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS RDISTRONIC PLUS Possible causes are: Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty Rthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety system is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.

A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. All driving systems and driving safety systems are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Switch off the engine. X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 285): Rin the radiator trim Rin the front bumper Rin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper

X Restart the engine. The display message disappears.

6 SRS Malfunction Service Required

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 40).

220 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6 Front Left Malfunc tion Service RequiredorFront Right Malfunction Service Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus- ter.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service RequiredorRight Side Curtain Air bag Malfunction Service Required

There is amalfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand head bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The left or right head bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 221

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Man ual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated during the journey, although: Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter- pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNING The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may not be triggered in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx- imately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49) Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys- tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul- tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas- sifies the occupant.

222 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor- rectly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled during the journey, even though: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys- tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The automatic front-passenger front air bag deactivation system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

G WARNING The front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag may be triggered unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front- passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx- imately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant

Display messages 223

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49) Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys- tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul- tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas- sifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor- rectly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).

Lights i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters: The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

b Check Left Corner ing Light or Check Right Cornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 115).

or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 115).

or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

224 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

b Check Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 115).

or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 115).

or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Center Brake Lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left Brake LamporCheck Right Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left Tail and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left High BeamorCheck Right High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 115).

or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b License Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 225

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

b Rear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Front Left Standing LamporCheck Front Right Standing Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 115).

or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Backup Light

The backup lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 115).

or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp

The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Rear Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Rear Right Sidemarker Lamp

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left Daytime Running LightorCheck Right Daytime Running Light

The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 115).

or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Active Headlamps Inoperative

The active light function is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Malfunction See Operator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

226 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

b Auto Lamp Function Inoperative

The light sensor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Switch Off Lights

You leave the vehicle and the light is still switched on. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to position.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper- ative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Availablemessage appears. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

+ Check Coolant Level See Opera tor's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 279).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work- shop.

? The fan motor is faulty. X At coolant temperatures below 248 (120 ), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun- tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Display messages 227

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

? Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 (120 ). Other- wise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 (120 ).

# See Operator's Man ual

The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

228 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Observe the instructions in the display message# See Operator's Manual.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

4 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 277).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 278). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if you need to add engine oil more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 277).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 278). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if you need to add engine oil more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Display messages 229

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

4 Engine Oil Level Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 277). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 278).

8 Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8 Gas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Attention Assist: Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest.

Attention Assist Inoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Off

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 179).

230 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period. Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavail able See Opera tor's Manual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe sensors are dirty. Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta- tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir- rors. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Clean the sensors (Y page 285). X Restart the engine.

Display messages 231

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist is defective. The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir- rors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance Inoperative

Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 184). X Restart the engine. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance Canceled

Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes are: RThe vehicle is skidding. Rthe sensors are dirty. Ra malfunction has occurred. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 184). If the multifunction display does not show the parking space sym- bol at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h): X Clean the sensors (Y page 285). X Restart the engine. If the multifunction display still does not show the parking space symbol at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h): X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer following the recommended path. X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages in the multifunction display.

Parking Guidance Finished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 170). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now Available

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo- rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 170).

232 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur rently Unavailable See Operator's Man ual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta- tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus pended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS - - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 170).

Cruise Control Inoperative

Cruise control is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control - - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 168).

Display messages 233

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Tire Pres sure Soon

Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal- led new wheels and tires. Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped

G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 291).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres- sure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 315).

Check Tire Pres sure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator

Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes- sage and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 315).

Run Flat Indicator Inoperative

Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

234 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Please Correct Tire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 316). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 318).

Tire Pressure Soon The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 291).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 316). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Mal function

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNING Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Ryou could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build- up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 291).

Display messages 235

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Tire Press. Moni tor Currently Unavailable

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen sor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon itor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.

Tire Press. Moni tor Inoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine

With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the transmission out of position P or N into another transmission position. X Depress the brake pedal. X Start the engine.

236 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehi cle Rolling Away

The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary

The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Pos sible Service Required

You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a mal- function. The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal function Stop

A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission com- ponents. A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to position N. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Display messages 237

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Auxiliary Battery Malfunction

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity. X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

N The trunk lid is open. X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open.

G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all the doors.

Power Steering Mal function See Oper ator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

J Trunk Partition Open

The trunk partition is open. X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89).

238 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display.

K Decrease Speed

You wanted to open the roof while the vehicle was in motion. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Open the roof (Y page 87).

K Vario-Roof Lower ing

The roof is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depres- surized. X Fully open or close the roof (Y page 87).

K Open/Close Vario- Roof Completely

The roof is not locked. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Push or pull and hold the roof switch until the roof is fully open or closed (Y page 87).

K Start Engine See Operator's Manual

The on-board voltage is too low. X Start the engine. X After approximately ten seconds, repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 87).

The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roof drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons. You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten minutes. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 87).

Close Rear Side Windows

You leave the vehicle and at least one rear side window is open. X Close the side windows (Y page 84).

Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 279).

Display messages 239

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Wiper Malfunction ing

The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc tioning

The hazard warning lamps are faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey.

Take Your Key from Ignition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. X Remove the SmartKey.

Obtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Change the battery (Y page 75).

Don't Forget Your Key

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The multifunction display shows the display message a maximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Key Not Detected (red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Locate the SmartKey. X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes- sage.

240 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the key is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.

Key Not Detected (white display mes- sage)

The SmartKey is currently undetected. X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey still cannot be detected: X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.

Remove 'Start' But ton and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn- ing tone also sounds. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps

General notes Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving.

Warning and indicator lamps 241

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Safety

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).

After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warn- ing tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). The warning tone ceases.

The red seat belt warn- ing lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out.

The red seat belt warn- ing lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

242 Warning and indicator lamps On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$ (USA only) J (Canada only) The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is run- ning. A warning tone also sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal- function.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

!

The yellowABSwarning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc- tion. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP (Electronic Stability Program), PRESAFE, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also deac- tivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec- ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans- mission, will not be available.

Warning and indicator lamps 243

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRESAFE, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are therefore also deactivated. Possible causes are: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete. Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec- ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move- ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

244 Warning and indicator lamps On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS, ESP, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRESAFE, the HOLD function and hill-start assist are also not available, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec- ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only) J (Canada only) !

The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP and ESP OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running.

ABS and ESP are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS, EBD, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRESAFE, the HOLD function and hill-start assist, for example, are not avail- able either. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec- ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps 245

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow ESP warn- ing lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.

ESP or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP. In rare cases (Y page 66) , it may be best to deactivate ESP. Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 66).

The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

ESP is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restric- ted. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP. In rare cases (Y page 66) , it may be best to deactivate ESP. Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 66).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M

Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles only: The yellow SPORT han- dling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations (Y page 67).

246 Warning and indicator lamps On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow ESP and ESP OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.

ESP, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRESAFE, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ESP and ESP OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.

ESP, BAS, PRESAFE, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move- ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps 247

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F (USA only) ! (Canada only) The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or lights up and/or !

the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6

The red restraint sys- tem warning lamp is lit while the engine is run- ning.

The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 40).

248 Warning and indicator lamps On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

;

The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the enginemay be in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special- ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal require- ments. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8

The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is run- ning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8

The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work- shop.

?

The red coolant warn- ing lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant tem- perature gage is at the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defec- tive. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps 249

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

?

The red coolant warn- ing lamp comes on while the engine is run- ning.

The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc- tioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 279).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below248 (120). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun- tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolant warn- ing lamp comes on while the engine is run- ning. A warning tone also sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 (120 ). The air- flow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.

G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).

250 Warning and indicator lamps On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 279).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 (120 ), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun- tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The red distance warn- ing lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action.

Observe the additional information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 170). Observe the additional information on COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 203).

Warning and indicator lamps 251

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h

The yellow combination low tire pressure tell- tale/TPMSmalfunction telltale for the TPMS (pressure loss or mal- function) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 291).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 316). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

The yellow combination low tire pressure tell- tale/TPMSmalfunction telltale for the TPMS (pressure loss or mal- function) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

252 Warning and indicator lamps On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Useful information ............................ 254 Stowage areas ................................... 254 Features ............................................. 256

253

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

Stowage areas

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when brak- ing or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situa- tions. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- trude from stowage compartments, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk.

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove box flap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards until it engages.

The glove box flap contains brackets for coins, pens, and credit and service cards.

The glove box can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it to position1.

254 Stowage areas St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest

X To open: push button: up and raise arm- rest;.

The stowage compartment can be locked and unlocked centrally using the SmartKey (Y page 72).

i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a 12 V power socket, USB port or a Media Interface is installed in the stowage com- partment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod or MP3 player (see the sepa- rate COMAND Operating Instructions).

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Stowage compartment in the center console

X To open: briefly press the lower section of cover:.

X To remove the insert: pull the left-hand side of the insert up and out.

X To install the insert: press the insert into the housing.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be an ashtray in the center console instead of a storage compartment.

Stowage compartment in the doors

In the door trim, there is a ruffled pocket; with storage slot:.

Stowage box in the rear wall between the seats A ruffled pocket is located on the rear wall between the seats.

Stowage areas 255

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

: Ruffled pocket

Stowage net Stowage nets are located in the front- passenger footwell and on the rear wall behind the driver's seat.

Reversible floor panel in the trunk Using the flat side of the reversible floor panel will give you a level trunk. If you turn the reversible floor panel over, you can transport objects, for example a drinks crate, on it.

X To turn over: pull up reversible floor panel; using strap:.

X Turn over reversible floor panel; and re- insert it.

Attached to the reversible floor panel are two flexible straps; that you can use to secure objects, for example wind screen=, when reversible floor panel: has been turned over.

Roof carrier ! This vehicle is not designed to transport items on the roof. Roof carriers and other devices which aremounted on the roof that have not been specifically approved for this model by Mercedes-Benz must not be used as they could damage the vehicle and the retractable hardtop (vario-roof). At the time of going to print, Mercedes- Benz does not offer any roof carrier or other roof-installed devices for this model.

! This vehicle is not designed to transport any items on the trunk lid or to allow lug- gage carriers or equipment of any kind to be installed to the trunk lid. Otherwise the vehicle and the retractable hardtop could be damaged.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants.

256 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

There is a risk of injury, especially when brak- ing or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situa- tions. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- trude from stowage compartments, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk.

! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the center console to continuous, strong and direct sunlight. The passenger compartment in the area of the center con- sole can otherwise be damaged by the con- centrated and reflected sunlight.

Cup holder in the center console

X To open: slide cover; back. X To remove the insert: slide catch: inwards on both sides in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove the cup holder insert upwards. X To re-install the insert: place the insert in the stowage space.

X Slide catch: outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages.

You can remove the cup holder insert for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

Bottle holder Observe the "Important safety notes" in the "Stowage compartments" section (Y page 254).

! Make sure that any bottles weighingmore than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the bottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle holder could otherwise be damaged.

X Press the outer edge of button: and slide in the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits into the opening.

X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder. The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l). The bottle holder does not secure the bottles; it merely prevents them from tipping over.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNING If themirror cover of the vanitymirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving.

Features 257

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

: Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover

i When driving at high speeds with the side window or roof open: If you have inserted a car park ticket into retaining strip=, make sure that it is not blown away by the wind.

Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light: only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket; andmirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the side X Fold down the sun visor. X Pull the sun visor out of retainer;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X Slide the sun visor horizontally as desired.

Ashtray

X To open: push the lower section of cover:. The cover opens.

X To remove the insert: lift insert= up; and out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert= into the holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

258 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Your attentionmust always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions per- mit. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X To open: push the lower section of cover:. The ashtray opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;. Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati- cally when the heating element is red-hot.

12 V sockets

General notes

! If you are using all sockets in the vehicle, make sure that you do not exceed the max- imum current draw of 55 A. Otherwise, you will overload the fuses.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso- ries include such items as chargers formobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This

ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket under the armrest

X Open the stowage compartment under the armrest (Y page 255).

X Lift up the cover of socket:. On vehicleswithout ashtrays or lighters, there is an additional socket in the center console.

Socket in the front-compartment center console

X To open: push the lower section of cover:. The stowage compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.

mbrace

General notes You must have a license agreement to acti- vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your

Features 259

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

system is activated and operational. To log in, press the MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hot- lines: RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with the service, a user ID and passwordwill be sent to you by post. USA only: you can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe correspondingmobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Cus- tomer Center Ra service subscription is available Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RGPS reception is available. Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press theW orX button on the mul- tifunction steering wheel.

or X Use the volume controller of the audio sys- tem/COMAND.

The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call RRoadside Assistance call RMB Info call USA only: you can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detec- ted if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in the MB Info call button does not light up during self-diag- nosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - MB Info call button RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop erative or Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction dis- play.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the systemmay not operate as expec- ted. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines: RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367

260 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Emergency call

Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi- lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehi- cle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regula- tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

You must have a license agreement to acti- vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To reg- ister, press the MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hot- lines: RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367

General notes Anemergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered.

i You cannot end an automatically trig- gered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated man- ually.

As soon as the emergency call has been ini- tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The multifunction display shows the Connecting Call message. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter- mined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been ini- tiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assis- tance Center and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter attempts to getmore information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the systemhas been unable to initiate an emergency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con- tinuously. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means.

Features 261

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashes until the emergency call is conclu- ded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

i If the mobile phone network is unavaila- ble, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS button, you will not know whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button:. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button: flashes while the call is active. The multifunction display shows the Con necting Callmessage. The audio output is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con nectedmessage appears in themultifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigationmenu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 266). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes- Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. Further details are available in your mbrace manual.

i The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis- tance call button: is flashing continu- ously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center was established.

262 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or X Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on the audio system or on COMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button:. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp inMB Info call button: flasheswhile the connection is beingmade. The multifunction display shows the Con necting Callmessage. The audio system is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con nectedmessage appears in themultifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigationmenu

by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod- ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz. USA only: you can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

i The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but- ton: is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center was established.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or X Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on the audio system or on COMAND.

Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emer- gency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

Features 263

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe~ button on themultifunction steer- ing wheel Rthe corresponding button on the audio sys- tem or on COMAND for ending a telephone call

i When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinations Downloading destinations gives you access to a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor- tant destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to 20 way points. You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. X Select Yes with the= or; buttons on the COMAND system.

X Confirm with the 9 button on the COMAND system.

The system calculates the route and subse- quently starts the route guidance with the address entered.

i If you select No, the address can be saved in the address book.

i The destination download function is available if the relevant mobile phone net- work is available and data transfer is pos- sible.

i The destination download function can only be used if the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system.

Route Assistance This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack- age and cannot be purchased separately.

i You can also use the Route Assistance function if your vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the cur- rent route section.

Search and Send

General notes i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navi- gation system. Additionally, an mbrace ser- vice subscription must be completed.

"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser- vice. A destination address which is found on Google Maps can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destination address X Go to the website http:// www.maps.google.com and enter a desti- nation address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account: click on the corresponding button on the website. i Example: If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:

264 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field.

X Click "Send".

i Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the website.

Calling up destination addresses X Switch on the ignition. The destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system. A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started.

X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The system calculates the route and sub- sequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.

i If you select No, the address can be saved in the address book.

i If you have sent more than one destina- tion address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately.

i Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote opening You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlock-

ingmay be delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely. X Contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone, Android)

To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if the correspondingmobile phone network is accessible.

Vehicle remote closing The valet locking feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, remote closingmay be delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked remotely. X Contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.

Features 265

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display. USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone, Android)

To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature is available when the relevant mobile phone network is available and data connection is possible.

Stolen vehicle recovery service If your vehicle has been stolen: X Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report.

X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter contacts you and the local law enforce- ment agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto- matically notified.

Vehicle Health Check With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer Assistance Center can provide improved sup- port for problemswith your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance Center. The customer service representative can use the received

data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. You will see the Roadside Assis tance Connected message in the COMAND display. If the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis can be started, the Request for vehicle diagnosis received. Start vehicle diagnosis? message appears in the display. X Confirm the message with Yes. X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please start ignition message appears, turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139).

X When the Please follow the instruc tions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position message appears, follow the customer ser- vice representative's instructions. The message in the display disappears. If you select Cancel the remote malfunc- tion diagnosis is canceled completely. The vehicle operating state check begins. You will see the Vehicle diagnosis activated message.

When the diagnosis is completed, the Trans fer vehicle diagnostics data (Voice connection may be interrupted dur ing data transfer)message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer Assistance center. X Press OK to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance Center is terminated. You will see the Vehicle diagnosis: Transferring data... message. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep- resentative agreed with you, the voice con-

266 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

nection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e- mail or phone. Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is the transfer of service data to the Customer Assistance Center. If a service is overdue, the COMAND display shows a message about various special offers at your workshop. USA only: this information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 27). Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 23).

Downloading routes Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system. To do this, an SD memory card must be inserted into the COMAND system. If no SD memory card is inserted, you must insert the card into the card slot on the COMAND system before saving. A route can be prepared and sent either by a customer service representative or via the mbrace portal on the Internet. Each route can include up to 20 way points. Once a route has been received by the navi- gation system, you will see the has been saved to memory card. Do you want to start route guidance? message in the COMANDdisplay. The route is saved to the SD memory card. X To start route guidance: select Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the display. i If you select No, the saved route can be called up later via the navigation menu.

X Select Start. Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be called up again in COMAND.

You can find further information in the sep- arate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Speed alert You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi- cle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The data you receive contains the following information: Rthe location where the speed limit was exceeded Rthe time at which the speed limit was exceeded Rthe selected speed limit which was excee- ded

Geo fencing Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boun- daries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultane- ously. Different settings are possible for each area. USA only: these settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representa- tive that you wish to activate geo fencing. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message.

Features 267

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Triggering the vehicle alarm With this function, you can trigger the vehi- cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink garage door opener integra- ted in the rear-viewmirror allows you to oper- ate up to three different door and gate sys- tems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following tele- phone assistance services: RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge)

More information on HomeLink and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com.

Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 25). USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, per- sons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door.

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programing buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 268).

Garage door remote controlA is not inclu- ded with the integrated garage door opener.

268 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to control the garage door drive.

X To start programing mode: press and hold one of buttons; to? on the inte- grated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in program- ing mode. After a short time, indicator lamp: lights up yellow. Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon as button;,= or? is programed for the first time. If the selected button has already been programed, indicator lamp: will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: point garage door remote controlA towards buttons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote control A until indicator lamp: lights up green. When indicator lamp: lights up green: programing is finished. When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro- graming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code (Y page 269).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the correspond- ing button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote controlA and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be neces- sary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 268).

If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programing button on the control panel of the door drive. The program- ing button may be positioned in different pla- ces depending on the manufacturer. It is usu- ally located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro- graming of additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programing button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini- tiate the next step.

Features 269

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programed button;,= or? on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete.

Notes on programing the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programing. Comparable with Canadian law, someU.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada Rif you have difficulties programing the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programing steps.

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Release the button. Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote controlA for two seconds, then release it for two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.

X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green. When indicator lamp: lights up green: programing is finished. When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro- graming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat the programing process for the corresponding button on the rear-viewmirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote con- trolA and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote controlA and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be neces- sary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programing

If you experience problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rear- viewmirror, take note of the following instruc- tions: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote controlA and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of the garage door drive remote control. The integrated garage door opener is com- patible with devices that have units which

270 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote controlA. This increases the like- lihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener. RWhen programing, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from the button which you are programing. Try vari- ous angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programing steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote controlA. RNote that some remote controls only trans- mit for a limited amount of time (the indi- cator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press buttonB on remote controlA again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal recep- tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X Press button;,= or? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indi- cator lamp: lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp: flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The trans- mission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if neces- sary.

Clearing the memory

Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X Press and hold buttons; and?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green.

X Release buttons; and?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Features 271

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Compass

Calling up the compass

Compass; displays the compass direction in which the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW. To receive a correct display in rear-view mir- ror:, the compass must be calibrated and the magnetic field zone set.

Setting the compass

North America zone map

South America zone map X Set your location using the zone maps.

272 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

X Push a round pen into opening =(Y page 272) for approximately three seconds. The zone currently selected appears in compass display;(Y page 272).

X To select the zone: push a round pen into opening=(Y page 272) until the desired zone is selected. If, after a few seconds, the display in com- pass display;(Y page 272) changes direction, the zone has been selected.

Calibrating the compass X Make sure that there is sufficient space for you to drive in a circle without impeding traffic.

In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do the following: Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not in the vicinity of steel structures or high- voltage transmission lines. Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the climate control, windshield wipers or rear window defroster. Rclose all doors and the trunk lid. X Switch on the ignition. X Push a round pen into opening =(Y page 272) for approximately six sec- onds, until symbol C is shown in compass display;(Y page 272).

X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx- imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h). When the calibration has successfully been completed, the current direction is shown in compass display;(Y page 272).

Floormats

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

X Slide the seat backwards. X To install: place the floormat in the foot- well.

X Press studs: onto retainers;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retain- ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Features 273

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

274

Useful information ............................ 276 Engine compartment ........................ 276 ASSYST PLUS .................................... 280 Care .................................................... 281

275

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement.

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- ple, away from moving parts

Opening the hood

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set inmotion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood.

276 Engine compartment M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood. The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han- dle; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hood X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.

Engine oil

Notes on the oil level Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Mercedes-AMG55SLK: before operation on race tracks, check the oil level (Y page 277) and top up (Y page 278) if necessary. Race track operation is only permitted with a max- imum engine oil level. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip- stick

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

Engine compartment 277

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Example X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guide tube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:. X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark= and MAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- ponents in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a ser- vice system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded Rusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to damage to the engine or the catalytic con- verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil cap X Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below theMINmark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil.

278 Engine compartment M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- stick (Y page 277).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 349).

Checking and adding other service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING The engine cooling system is pressurized, par- ticularly when the engine is warm. When opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. Wear eye and hand protection when opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a turn to allow pressure to escape.

Example

X Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehi- cle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 140).

X Check the coolant temperature gauge in the multifunction display. The coolant temperature must be below 158 (70 ).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X Slowly turn cap; half a turn counter- clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap; further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level ofmarker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank:. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fuel filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank:.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes- ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap; and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.

For further information on coolant, see (Y page 350).

Windshield washer system

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

Engine compartment 279

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer con- centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Example X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab. X Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap: onto the filler neck until it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the rec- ommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompt- ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 239). Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 351).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messages The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet). You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the

engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 277).

The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. Days RService A Due RService A Exceeded by .. Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnec- ted. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before discon- necting the battery.

or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display.

Hiding a service message X Press theaor%button on the steer- ing wheel.

280 ASSYST PLUS M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Displaying service messages X Switch on the ignition. X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing thea button. The service due date appears in the multi- function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- play has been inadvertently reset, this set- ting can be corrected at a qualified special- ist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth- erwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example.

Special service requirements The specifiedmaintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, mainte- nance work must be carried out more fre- quently, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- ate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances

Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long peri- ods

Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist work- shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter.

Driving abroad AnextensiveMercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

Notes on care

H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsibleman- ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you

Care 281

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

should drive for a few minutes after clean- ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents rec- ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- cally in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti- vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func- tion in the following or other similar situa- tions: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

! It is preferable to use car washes with adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning that corresponds to the specification for the Cabriolet program. In car washes that use high water pressures, there is a risk that a small amount of water may leak into the vehicle.

! Lock the car if you wash it in an automatic car wash. Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

If you have your vehicle cleaned in a high- pressure automatic car wash, small amounts of water may enter the vehicle.

! Make sure that the automatic transmis- sion is in position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi- cle could be damaged if the transmission is in another position.

! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the roof are com- pletely closed Rthe climate control blower is switched off Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0

The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the wind- shield.

Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in all coun- tries concerned. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently.

282 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Compo- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- edly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced imme- diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtires Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. Relectrical components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures.

! Do not use high-pressure cleaners if the tank recess is open while you clean it. This can cause damage to the seals or other components.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inade- quate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recom- mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate con- ditions and the care product used. If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes- Benz should be used. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Care 283

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with unsuitable materials Rfrequent use of automatic car washes Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable sur- face damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Compo-

nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- edly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced imme- diately.

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after clean- ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- vents to clean the inside of thewindows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstan- ces prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components.

284 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

X Clean the inside and outside of the win- dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a dis- tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufac- turer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact

Care 285

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touch- ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- based cleaning agents, such as bathroom cleaner or wheel cleaner.

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care product tested and approved byMercedes- Benz.

Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win- ter and after washing.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- lowing: Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household clean- ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara- ble damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer- cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro- fiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deploy- ment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa- ces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recom- mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- ments

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and

286 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes ! Do not usemicrofiber cloths to clean gen- uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover.

i Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov- ers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz. You can obtain these from a quali- fied specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example:

Rdifferences in the texture Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rslight nuances of color These are characteristics of leather and not material defects.

Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with amicrofiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and alwayswipe entire seat sec- tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 (80 ) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu- tion.

Care 287

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Cleaning the headliner and carpets X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean- ing agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

288 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Useful information ............................ 290 Where will I find...? ........................... 290 Flat tire .............................................. 291 Battery (vehicle) ................................ 296 Jump-starting .................................... 299 Towing and tow-starting .................. 301 Fuses .................................................. 304

289

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notes The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow- age well under the trunk floor.

i Apart from certain country-specific varia- tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang- ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform awheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist work- shop. Tools required for changing a wheel may include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench RRatchet wrench RAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Example: equipment and country-specific varia- tions possible : Tire sealant filler bottle : Tire sealant filler bottle ; Fuse allocation chart = Tire inflation compressor ? Towing eye X Lift the trunk floor up. X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 292).

Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel

: Folding wheel chock ; Fuse allocation chart = Jack ? Sheet for faulty wheel A Alignment bolt B Lug wrench C Towing eye D Valve extractor E Tire inflation compressor

290 Where will I find...? Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

X Lift the trunk floor up. X Remove the collapsible spare wheel (Y page 340).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: Rtires with run-flat characteristics (MOExtended tires) (Y page 291) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 339) Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you addi- tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist work- shop. Information on changing/mounting a wheel (Y page 330). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 140).

X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the bar- rier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf- fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)

General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tiremust not showany clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load- bearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 324). MOExtended tires may only be used in con- junction with an active tire pressure loss warning systemorwith an active tire pressure monitor. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions in the displaymes- sages (Y page 234). Rcheck the tire for damage. Rif driving on, observe the following notes. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.

Flat tire 291

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- tance possible depends upon: Rvehicle speed Rroad condition Routside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving condi- tions or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from themoment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction dis- play. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tires: Rsize Rthe type and Rthe "MOExtended" mark If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand- ard tire may be used as a temporary meas- ure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit is available, for example, from a qualified specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner- ing, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,

and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. Rthe vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RESP is intervening constantly. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem- peratures down to 4 (20 ).

G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis- tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- tion. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury.

292 Flat tire Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor- oughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres- sor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be oper- ated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturers safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom- panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla- tion compressor from the stowage well underneath the trunk floor (Y page 290).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire.

: Tire sealant filler bottle ; Tire inflation compressor = Connector ? On/off switch A Cap B Filler hose X Remove filler hoseB and plug= from the bottom section of the tire inflation com- pressor housing.

X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the mounting on yellow capA of tire seal- ant bottle: until the plug engages.

X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow capA of tire sealant bottle: into the mounting of tire inflation compressor;. The cap must engage in both hooks.

Flat tire 293

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faulty tire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valve. X Insert plug= into the socket of the ciga- rette lighter (Y page 258) or into a 12 V socket in your vehicle (Y page 259).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X Press on and off switch? on the tire infla- tion compressor to ON. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approx- imately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation com- pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) is achieved after a maximum of ten minutes, see (Y page 294). If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) is not achieved after a maximum of ten minutes, see (Y page 294).

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reached If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.

After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pressuremust be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).

G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- acteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.

294 Flat tire Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

If tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved after a maximum period of ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- acteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can- ada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release button: next to pres- sure gauge;.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire.

X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire inflation compressor, press together the locking tabs on the yellow cap.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Flat tire 295

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should there- fore have all work involving the battery car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys- tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP, see (Y page 61) and (Y page 65).

G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhen charging the battery as well as when jump- starting.

Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build- up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produ- ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into con- tact with vehicle parts. RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat- tery. RIt is important that you observe the descri- bed order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and dis- connecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batter- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- tion.

296 Battery (vehicle) Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop or a special collection point for used bat- teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Main- tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Ryou switch off the engine and remove the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys- tem may be damaged. Rin vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehi- cle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation.

In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- mum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Comply with safety precautions and take pro- tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat- tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and face- guard. Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physi- cian if necessary. Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery discon- nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further infor- mation. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe- cialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time.

Battery (vehicle) 297

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power.

i If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will have to: Rset the clock; see the separate operating instructions. On vehicles with COMAND and a naviga- tion system, the clock is set automati- cally. Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 104).

Charging the battery

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batter- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- tion.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- tures below freezing point. When jump-start- ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.

Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi- mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump- starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump- start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed- out battery may be shorter. The starting char- acteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out bat- tery checked at a qualified specialist work- shop. Read the battery charger's operating instruc- tions before charging the battery. X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor bat- tery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 299).

298 Battery (vehicle) Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven- tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out batterymay be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting 299

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables are connected to the battery. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump- starting device. X Slide cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryB using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal; on your own vehicle first.

300 Jump-starting Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then from positive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rthe towing eye could detach itself Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- over.

There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the per- missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC:

! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop but- ton. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock and shift the automatic trans- mission toN. Then, turn the SmartKey back to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock.

Vehicles with 9G-TRONIC:

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop but- ton. Otherwise, the automatic transmission may shift to position P when the driver's or

front-passenger door are opened, which could lead to damage to the transmission.

All vehicles:

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- cally in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti- vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func- tion in the following or other similar situa- tions: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! Drive slowly and smoothly when towing. Excessive tractive power could otherwise damage the vehicles.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle.

! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting 301

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported.

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum per- missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi- cle.

i Information on your vehicle's gross vehi- cle weight rating can be found on the vehi- cle identification plate; see the printed Operator's Manual.

i Information on your vehicle's gross vehi- cle weight rating can be found on the vehi- cle identification plate (Y page 345).

It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. Vehicles with automatic transmission: when towing a vehicle, the automatic trans- mission must be in position N. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot shift the transmission to position N on vehicles with automatic transmission.

Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC: release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P (Y page 157). Before the vehicle is towed, deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 206). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipemay be very hot. There is a risk of burns when removing the rear cover.

Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular care when removing the rear cover.

Themountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear, behind the covers. X Press the mark on cover: inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Take cover: off the opening. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 290).

X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eye X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. X Attach cover: to the bumper and press until it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 290).

Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground

G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident.

302 Towing and tow-starting Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

Vehicles with 9G-TRONIC: the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front- passenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. Vehicles with automatic transmission: in order to ensure that the automatic transmis- sion stays in positionNwhen towing away the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 111).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 140).

X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock.

In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indica- tor lamps for the direction of travel flash. When you reset the combination switch, the hazard warning flashers start flashing again. It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 301).

Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP could other- wise damage the brake system.

! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be towedwith the rear axle raised. The vehicle/trailer combination may oth- erwise swerve or even roll over.

Transporting the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock.

X Shift the transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Secure the vehicle.

Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could other- wise damage the automatic transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting" at (Y page 299). Before tow-starting: Rthe battery must be connected Rthe engine must be cold Rthe exhaust systemmust have cooled down When tow-starting, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 301).

Towing and tow-starting 303

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 111).

X Install the towing eye (Y page 302). X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing rope.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock.

X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage sec- ond gear and keep the clutch pedal depressed.

X Release the brake pedal. X Tow-start the vehicle. X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not depress the accelerator pedal while doing so.

X As soon as the engine starts, depress the clutch pedal immediately and shift to neu- tral.

X Stop at a suitable place, in accordance with the traffic conditions.

X Depress the parking brake. X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. X Remove the towing eye (Y page 302). X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- age, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or sys- tems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- nents on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe- cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuse X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).

X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- tion lock and remove it (Y page 139).

or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 140).

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box in the trunk The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the trunk floor (Y page 290).

Fuse box in the engine compartment i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 304).

G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set inmotion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.

304 Fuses Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off.

X Open the hood. X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box.

X To open: open clamp:. X Remove fuse box cover; forwards.

X To close: check whether the seal is seated correctly in cover;.

X Insert cover; at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer.

X Fold down cover; and close clamps:. X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunk i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 304).

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.

The fuse box is located in the trunk behind the partition covering. X Open the trunk lid. X To open: release cover: on the right and left-hand sides with a flat object.

X Open cover: downwards in the direction of the arrow.

Fuses 305

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

306

Useful information ............................ 308 Important safety notes ..................... 308 Operation ........................................... 308 Winter operation ............................... 310 Tire pressure ..................................... 311 Loading the vehicle .......................... 319 All about wheels and tires ............... 322 Changing a wheel .............................. 330 Wheel and tire combinations ........... 335 Emergency spare wheel ................... 339

307

W he el s an d tir es

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmodel When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel

G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warn- ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- shop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations Information on the sizes and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 335). Information on tire pressure can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 319) Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 159) Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Operation

Information on driving Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus- pect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over

308 Operation W he el s an d tir es

curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth- erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam- age such as: Rcuts in the tires Rpunctures Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 309). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 311). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 339).

The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving style RTire pressure RDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- ditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: in (3 mm) RM+S tires: in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator for tread wear (arrow) is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of

Operation 309

W he el s an d tir es

Z

approximately in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to install a dif- ferent type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 291). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60miles (100 km). They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the lat- est, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in con- junction with an active tire pressure loss warning systemorwith an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 291).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.

A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali- fied specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notes Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali- fied specialist workshop at the onset of win- ter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 330).

Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 (+7), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehi- cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires perma- nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage.

G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 (+7), use win- ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing thei snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-

310 Winter operation W he el s an d tir es

vide the best possible grip in wintry road con- ditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety sys- tems such as ABS and ESP to function opti- mally in winter. These tires have been devel- oped specifically for driving in snow. UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling charac- teristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. When you have mounted the M+S tires: X Check the tire pressures (Y page 315). X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres- sure loss warning system (Y page 315).

X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 316).

Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 339).

Snow chains

G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist work- shop.

If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 335). ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possi- ble when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg- ulations if you wish to install snow chains. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

You may wish to deactivate ESP when pull- ing away with snow chains installed (Y page 66). You can thereby allow thewheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 339).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer- ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Tire pressure 311

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires includ- ing the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least Rif the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications on the sample Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pres- sure tables are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pres- sure table on the vehicle.

General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Operation with an emergency spare wheel: information on operation with an emergency spare wheel can be found in the general notes in the "Emergency sparewheel" section (Y page 339). Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 319). The Tire and Loading Information placard con- tains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires approved for this vehicle by the factory, see illustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recom- mended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different

312 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

numbers of occupants and amounts of lug- gage. The actual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 324). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. Formore information, contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.

RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres- sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend- ent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- sures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 (10 ), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ 1.5 psi). Take this into account when check- ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the result-

Tire pressure 313

W he el s an d tir es

Z

ing value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emer- gency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can over- heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg- ular wear, which can severely impair the brak- ing properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may: Roverheat, leading to tire defects Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac- teristics Rwear quickly and unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflation

G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac- teristics Rwear quickly and unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres- sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the rec- ommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 311).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notes Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 311).

314 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard on the B-pillar Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pres- sure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (Y page 311).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only)

General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pres- sure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction dis- play.

You can recognize the tire pressure losswarn- ing by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message which appears in the Serv. menu of the multifunc- tion display. Information on the message dis- play can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 315).

Important safety notes The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 311). The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor- nering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou drive with a heavy load.

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- ing system Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tire pressure Rchanged the wheels or tires Rmounted new wheels or tires

Tire pressure 315

W he el s an d tir es

Z

X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 311).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139).

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select Tire Pressure.

X Press thea button. The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press thea button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to select Yes.

X Press thea button. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction dis- play. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the% button. or X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, use the9 or: button to select Cancel.

X Press thea button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notes If a tire pressuremonitor is installed, the vehi- cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres- sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a fewminutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Serv. menu of the multi- function display.

Example: current tire pressure display

For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni- cally" section (Y page 318).

Important safety notes

G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once a month when cold and inflated to the pressure rec- ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard or the tire pressure label, you

316 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- sure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- ping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequencewill be repeated every time the vehi- cle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- tions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmal- function telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function prop- erly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 311). Note that the correct tire pres- sure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjust- ing the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 318). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pres- sure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 311). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn- ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat- ing pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi- cates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is signif- icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 234). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunc- tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indica- ted. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approx-

Tire pressure 317

W he el s an d tir es

Z

imately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the on- board computer may differ from those meas- ured at a gas station with a pressure gage. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val- ues indicated by a pressure gage are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressuremonitor can be affected by interference from radio trans- mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni- cally X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139).

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select Tire Pressure.

X Press thea button. The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored.

i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been

removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the posi- tion where the spare wheel is mounted is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes- sages If the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp comes on. RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction dis- play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low and must be corrected at the next opportunity. RIf the Check Tiresmessage appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly and the tires must be checked. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has drop- ped suddenly and the tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 234).

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be dis- played for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressuremonitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the refer- ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you

318 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recom- mended for the corresponding driving sit- uation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 311). Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (Y page 311).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the=or;button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select Tire Pressure.

X Press thea button. The multifunction display shows the cur- rent tire pressure for the individual tires or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes mes- sage.

X Press the: button. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press thea button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction dis- play. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the% button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres- sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A FCC ID: MRXGG4 FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A IC: 2546A-GG4 IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permis- sible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pres- sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up

Loading the vehicle 319

W he el s an d tir es

Z

of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu- pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maxi- mum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight: is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the speci- fied value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustra- tion are examples. The maximum permis- sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle- specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the validmaximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustra- tion are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load- ing Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".

320 Loading the vehicle W he el s an d tir es

X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com- bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicles Tire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilo- grams or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capa- city calculated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and num- ber and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 319). The greater the combined weight of the occu- pants, the lower the maximum luggage load.

Step 1

Example 1 Example 2

Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Load- ing Informa- tion placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2

Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occu- pants)

1 2

Weight of the occupants

Occu- pant 1: 175 lbs (80 kg)

Occu- pant 1: 175 lbs (80 kg) Occu- pant 2: 195 lbs (88 kg)

Gross weight of all occu- pants

175 lbs (80 kg)

370 lbs (168 kg)

Loading the vehicle 321

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2

Permissible load (maxi- mum gross vehicleweight rating from the Tire and Loading Infor- mation plac- ard minus the gross weight of all occu- pants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 175 lbs (80 kg) = 1325 lbs (600 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 370 lbs (168 kg) = 1130 lbs (512 kg)

Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 319). Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers and the loadmust not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be car- ried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehi- cle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants and the load) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their pur- pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia- ble information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: treadwear grade:, traction grade; and temperature grade=. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Where applicable, the tire grading informa- tion can be found on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum tire width. Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 RTraction grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

322 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how- ever, and may depart significantly from the norm, due to variations in driving habits, ser- vice practices and differences in road char- acteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfa- ces. You should pay special attention to road con- ditions when temperatures are around freez- ing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 309).Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than

on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (Y page 310).

Temperature

G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is estab- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. These represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dis- sipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera- ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tiresmustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

All about wheels and tires 323

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 328)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 327)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 326) ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 314) A Manufacturer B Tire material (Y page 327) C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed index (Y page 324) D Load index (Y page 326) E Tire name The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designa- tion) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- ate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating

G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- city and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

: Tire width ; Nominal aspect ratio in % = Tire code ? Rim diameter A Load bearing index B Speed rating General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size descrip- tion (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufac- turing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manu- facturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. Tire width: tire width: shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect

324 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the man- ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diam- eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is a numerical code that specifies the maxi- mum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissi- ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 319). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on themaximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 326). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 326). Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- ate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic condi- tions.

Sum- mer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149mph (240 km/h)may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of load-bearing indexA and speed ratingB. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifica- tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam- ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maxi- mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specifi- cationmust be given in parentheses. Exam- ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating

All about wheels and tires 325

W he el s an d tir es

Z

"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed.

All- weather tires and win- ter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have thei snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufac- turers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been espe- cially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding the following speeds: RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles): 130 mph (210 km/h) RMercedes-AMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h) RMercedes-AMG vehicles with Performance Package: 174 mph (280 km/h)

The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac- tory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "tires" section (Y page 335).

Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, load rat- ing:may be imprinted after the letters that identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire (Y page 324). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- ate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

326 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

Maximum load rating: is the maximum per- missible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissi- ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 319).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of every tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers or retreaders to notify customers of recalls or other safety-related matters. It makes it pos- sible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN consists of the manufacturer identi- fication code;, tire size=, tire type code? and manufacturing dateA. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol: indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manu- facturer identification code; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols.

For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 308). Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- ate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall: and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- ate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.

All about wheels and tires 327

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the United States Department of Transporta- tion.

Normal occupant weight The number of occupants which the vehicle is designed for, multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lb).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressure The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard con- tains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recom- mended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment This is the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehi- cle, regardless of whether it is actually instal- led on the vehicle or not.

Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identifica- tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug- gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica- ble. The gross vehicleweightmust not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occu- pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose- weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle iden- tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of: Rthe curb weight of the vehicle Rthe weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment

Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.

328 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load indexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa- city more precisely.

Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equip- ment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi- tioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load rating The maximum tire load is the maximum per- missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing themaximum axle load of one axle by two.

PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent.

Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressure The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road.

Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim.

Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead.

Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs). These optional extras, such as high-perform- ance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the acces- sories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains themaximum load bearing capacity of a tire.

All about wheels and tires 329

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis- tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions.

Total load limit Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the num- ber of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tire The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 291) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 291).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci- dent. Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheels and tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are loca- ted in the wheel.

Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the elec- tronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes when changing a wheel (Y page 331). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manu- facturer's warranty book in your vehicle docu- ments. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may be required earlier. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec- essary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor.

Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed correspond- ing to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheels Storewheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

330 Changing a wheel W he el s an d tir es

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straight- ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 140).

X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

i Due to differences in vehicle equipment, not all vehicles are equipped with a tire- change tool kit. For information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center. Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 290). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards:. X Fold out lower plate;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level ground X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Changing a wheel 331

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack- ing up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising the vehi- cle: RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle- specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor- rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi- cle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for per- forming maintenance work under the vehi- cle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes.

RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Never disen- gage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load- bearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RNever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com- pletely.

332 Changing a wheel W he el s an d tir es

The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers installed next to the jacking points on the outer sills.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover; upwards.

= Jacking point ? Jack A Ratchet wrench

X Position jack? at jacking point=.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point.

X Turn crankA clockwise until jack? sits completely on jacking point=. The base of the jack must lie evenly on the ground.

X Turn crankA until the tire is raised a max- imum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel.

Changing a wheel 333

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec- tion (Y page 330). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin- ger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- tight.

X Vehicles with a collapsible sparewheel: inflate the collapsible spare wheel (Y page 340). Only then lower the vehicle.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clock- wise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- wise pattern in the sequence indicated (: toA). The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again.

334 Changing a wheel W he el s an d tir es

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun- ted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 311).

i When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning sys- tem or tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure control system: all installedwheelsmust be equip- ped with functioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi- cle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1=Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes- ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer- tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addi- tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-

sion variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in dam- age to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tes- ted and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre- vious damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes- Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage.

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow- ing tire tables: RBA: both axles RFA: front axle RRA: rear axle The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard with the recommended tire pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 311). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte- nance recommendations of the tire manufac- turer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment always equip the vehicle with: Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum- mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)

Wheel and tire combinations 335

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Exception: it is permissible to install a dif- ferent type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 291).

Vehicles equipped withMOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you addi- tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist work- shop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries.

i The following pages contain information on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras. If you want to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, it may be necessary to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding size. The size of the approved winter tires may differ from the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equip- ment installed at the factory. The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

336 Wheel and tire combinations W he el s an d tir es

Tires

SLK 300

Summer tires R17

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/45 R17 91 W2

RA: 245/40 R17 91 W2, 3

FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL

RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL3

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL4

RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL3, 4

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

Winter tires R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended tires. 3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 4 USA only.

Wheel and tire combinations 337

W he el s an d tir es

Z

SLK 350

Summer tires R17

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/45 R17 91 W2

RA: 245/40 R17 91 W2, 3

FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL

RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL3

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL4

RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL3, 4

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

Winter tires R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended tires. 3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 4 USA only.

338 Wheel and tire combinations W he el s an d tir es

Mercedes-AMG SLK 55

Summer tires R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL

RA: 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL3

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

Winter tires R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)

FA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si

RA: 255/35 R18 94 V XL M+Si3

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

Emergency spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNING The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mounting an emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Radapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or emergency spare wheel that differs in size. Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size briefly.

Rdo not switch ESP off. Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Snow chains must not be mounted on emer- gency spare wheels.

General notes You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as nec- essary (Y page 311). The applicable value is

3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Emergency spare wheel 339

W he el s an d tir es

Z

found on the wheel or under "Technical data" (Y page 342). An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emer- gency spare wheel. Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel.

i When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning sys- tem or tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tire pres- sure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the moun- ted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emer- gency spare wheel.

Removing theemergency sparewheel

(Example)

The collapsible spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor.

X Lift and remove the reversible floor panel in the trunk (Y page 256).

X Turn retaining screw; counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Remove collapsible spare wheel:. Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 331).

Stowing the emergency spare wheel ! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, mois- ture may get into the vehicle.

Take the following steps to stow a used col- lapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, the collaps- ible spare wheel will not fit in the trunk in the intended manner. Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. X If possible, unscrew the valve insert from the valve and release the air. i Fully deflating the tires can take a few minutes.

X Screw the valve insert back into the valve. X Screw the valve cap back on. X Pull the protective sheet provided with the spare wheel over the collapsible spare wheel.

X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel well under the trunk.

X Use the retaining screw to pierce the pro- tective sheet and fasten the collapsible spare wheel in place.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel ! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the tire inflation compressor before lower- ing the vehicle. The wheel rim could other- wise be damaged.

340 Emergency spare wheel W he el s an d tir es

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres- sor for longer than ten minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be oper- ated again once it has cooled down.

X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as described (Y page 331). The collapsible spare wheel must be moun- ted before it is inflated.

X Pull plug? out of the housing. X Take the filler hose out of the housing. X Insert the yellow hose connector of the filler hose into the guide in the housing and push it into the fixture until the hose con- nector engages.

X Remove the cap from the valve on the col- lapsible spare wheel.

X Screw union nut: on the filler hose onto the valve.

X Make sure the tire inflation compressor's on/off switchA is set to OFF.

X Insert plug? into the socket of the ciga- rette lighter or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle. Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter (Y page 258). Observe the notes on sock- ets (Y page 259).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 139).

X Press on/off switchA on the tire inflation compressor to ON. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge=.

X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pres- sure. The specified tire pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.

X When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on/off switchA toOFF, on the tire inflation compressor. The tire inflation compressor is switched off.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.

X If the tire pressure is higher than the speci- fied pressure, press pressure release but- ton; until the correct tire pressure has been reached.

X Unscrew union nut: on the filler hose from the valve.

X Screw the cap onto the valve of the col- lapsible spare wheel again.

Removing the filler hose X To remove the filler hose from the tire infla- tion compressor, push down the rocker switch on the hose connector and pull out the filler hose.

X Stow plug? and the filler hose in the lower section of the compressor housing.

X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle.

Emergency spare wheel 341

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Technical data

All models

Collapsible emergency spare wheel5

Tires Alloy wheels

145/70-17 92 P Tire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi)

4.5 B x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 0.47 in (12 mm)

Depending on the country, the engine and the wheels mounted, your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT or a collapsible spare wheel.

i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.

5 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

342 Emergency spare wheel W he el s an d tir es

Useful information ............................ 344 Information regarding technical data .................................................... 344 Vehicle electronics ........................... 344 Identification plates ......................... 345 Service products and filling capaci- ties ..................................................... 347 Vehicle data ....................................... 352

343

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 25).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Tampering with the engine electron- ics ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating com- ponents and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalida- ted.

Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters)

G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from modified or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from incor- rectly operated RF transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example: Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with an exterior antenna Rthe exterior antenna has been installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior antenna mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehi- cle, always connect them with the low-reflec- tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permitmay be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. Rcompliance with the maximum permissi- ble output in these wavebands is required. Ronly approved antenna positions may be used.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discus- sions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. The following antenna positions may be used if RF transmitters have been properly instal- led:

344 Vehicle electronics Te ch ni ca ld at a

Approved antenna positions : Rear fender

i On the rear fenders, it is recommended to position the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road.

Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installa- tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmit- ting equipment). Observe the legal require- ments for retrofittings. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the man- ufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi- mum transmission outputs or antenna posi- tions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the following values:

Waveband Maximum transmission

output

Short wave 3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband 74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Waveband Maximum transmission

output

Trunked radio/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle with- out restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis- sion output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequen- cies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra) RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G) There is no restriction for antenna positions on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio/Tetra R70 cm waveband R2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi- cle identification number (VIN)

Identification plates 345

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) ; VIN = Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) ; VIN = Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identifica- tion plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Slide the front-passenger seat to its front most position.

X Fold trim: upwards. VIN; can be seen.

The VIN can also be found in the following locations: Ron the vehicle identification plate (Y page 345) Ron the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 346)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate, including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into the crank- case)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

346 Identification plates Te ch ni ca ld at a

Service products and filling capaci- ties

Important safety notes

G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and haz- ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.

H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environ- mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing, and disposing of service fluids. Components and service products must be matched. You should therefore only use prod- ucts that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information about tested and approved prod- ucts can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip- tion on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indi- cate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.

MB 229.51). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- sion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance with- out delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ing. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capa- city

All models 18.5 US gal (70.0 l)

Service products and filling capacities 347

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

Model Of which reserve

All models Approx. 2.4 US gal (9.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni- tion if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali- fied specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure.

! Do not use the following: RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RGasoline with metalliferous additives RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi- tives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur. This does not include cleaning addi- tives for the removal and prevention of res- idue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixed with cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform- ance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila- ble and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol- lowing precautions: ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg- ular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm.

Youwill usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assis- tance.

i For further information, consult a quali- fied specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

As a temporarymeasure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per- formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel- eration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI. Information on refueling (Y page 158).

Additives in gasoline ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recom- mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommen-

348 Service products and filling capacities Te ch ni ca ld at a

ded additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some coun- tries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso- line may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to ful- fill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions in the service inter- val display regarding the oil change. Other- wise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the impor- tant safety notes on service products (Y page 347). The engine oils are matched to the perform- ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle.

Model MB-Freigabe or MB- Approval

All models 229.5

MercedesAMG vehicles: use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil con- tainers.

Filling capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.

Model Capacity

SLK 300 6.7 US qt (6.3 l)

SLK 350 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

MercedesAMG SLK 55

10.0 US qt (9.5 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin. Select an engine oil with an SAE classification (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside

Service products and filling capacities 349

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low- temperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you carry out reg- ular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 347). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB- Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist work- shop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in theMaintenance Booklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- ponents in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add anti- freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con- tact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in theMaintenance Booklet.

Complywith the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 347). The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Rcorrosion protection Rantifreeze protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 (-37), the boiling point of the cool-

350 Service products and filling capacities Te ch ni ca ld at a

ant during operation is approximately 266 (130 ). The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra- tion in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 (-37 ). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 [-45 ]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord- ance withMB Specifications for Service Prod- ucts 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil- led with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec- tion.

i The coolant is checked with every main- tenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop.

Filling capacities Missing values were not available at time of going to print.

Model Capacity

SLK 300 Approx. 10.0 US qt (9.5 l)

SLK 350 Approx. 11.0 US qt (10.4 l)

MercedesAMG SLK 55

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer con- centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked.

When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 347). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit.

X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter- Fit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round.

Service products and filling capacities 351

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member.

! Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other- wise, the climate control system may be damaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard J639 included. Always have work on the climate control sys- tem carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant

Warning symbol: advises you about: Rpossible dangers Rhaving service work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop

Filling capacities

Model Refrigerant

MercedesAMG vehicles

22.2 0.4 oz (630 10 g)

All other models 19.4 0.4 oz (550 10 g)

Model PAG oil

MercedesAMG vehicles

2.8 oz (80 g)

All other models 4.2 oz (120 g)

Vehicle data

General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload.

352 Vehicle data Te ch ni ca ld at a

Dimensions and weights

Model : Opening height

All models (70.7 in) (1796 mm)

Missing values were not available at time of going to print.

MercedesAMG vehicles

Vehicle length 163.2 in (4146mm)

Vehicle length when opening/ closing the roof

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

79.0 in (2006 mm)

Vehicle height 51.2 in (1301 mm)

Vehicle height, when opening/ closing the roof

Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm)

Turning radius 34.6 ft (10.55 m)

Maximum trunk load

220 lb (100 kg)

All other models

Vehicle length 162.8 in (4134mm)

Vehicle length when opening/ closing the roof

170.0 in (4319mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

79.0 in (2006 mm)

Vehicle height 51.3 in (1303 mm)

Vehicle height, when opening/ closing the roof

61.5 in (1561 mm)

Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm)

Turning radius 34.5 ft (10.52 m)

Maximum trunk load

220 lb (100 kg)

Vehicle data 353

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

354

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the SLK Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz SLK 2016 Operator's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operator's Manual for Mercedes-Benz SLK as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operator's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz SLK. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz SLK 2016 Operator's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz SLK 2016 Operator's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz SLK 2016 Operator's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz SLK 2016 Operator's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz SLK 2016 Operator's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.